187
MAURY MICROWAVE C O R P O R A T I O N

MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

  • Upload
    vothien

  • View
    227

  • Download
    1

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVEC O R P O R A T I O N

Page 2: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 3: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVEC O R P O R A T I O N

Operating ManualMT993-2 Rev L 10/24/02

Automated Tuner System

PC Based ApplicationSoftware

Revision 3.00

• S-Parameters• Noise Characterization• Power Characterization• Intermodulation Distortion• Adjacent Channel Power• Signal Synthesis• DC I-V Curves• Harmonic Tuning• Oscillator Load Pull• Enhanced Graphics

Copyright 2002 by Maury Microwave Corporation. All rights reserved.

Models: MT993A MT993B MT993C MT993D

MT993HMT993N01MT993N07

MT993D01MT993D02MT993FMT993G

Page 4: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 5: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

Contents

i

MAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 MT993-2

1.0 General Information ............................ 1-11.1 Introduction ............................................. 1-11.2 Description ...............................................1-11.3 Hardware Key ...........................................1-21.4 Computer Requirements ............................1-31.5 Equipment Requirements ..........................1-31.6 Software Limits ..........................................1-4

2.0 Introduction to the System ................ 2-12.1 General .................................................... 2-12.2 Text Conversions Used ..............................2-52.3 Menu Structure Overview ........................ 2-52.4 Getting Help .............................................2-62.5 Demo Mode............................................. 2-7

3.0 Installing the Maury ATSApplication Software .......................... 3-1

3.1 General .................................................... 3-13.2 System Requirements ............................... 3-13.3 Setting Up the National Instruments

GPIB Card ..................................................3-13.4 Installing Maury ATS Software Under

Windows® 98/2000/XP ............................3-2

4.0 Setting Up the SystemConfiguration ...................................... 4-1

4.1 Overview of the Setup Process ................. 4-14.2 System Configuration ............................... 4-14.3 Editing the Block Diagram........................ 4-34.4 Setting Up the Instruments ........................4-54.5 Setting Up the Default Files

and Directories ........................................ 4-64.6 Selecting Setup Options ............................4-84.7 Editing Noise Source Files ........................ 4-244.8 Editing Power Sensor Files ........................ 4-264.9 Fixture Deembedding ............................... 4-274.10 Manipulating S-Parameters ........................4-334.11 Displaying Software Version .....................4-35

5.0 Calibrating the System ....................... 5-15.1 Calibrating the Tuners ...............................5-15.2 S-Parameter Calibration ............................5-95.3 Noise Calibration ......................................5-115.4 Power Calibration .....................................5-135.5 Intermod Calibration .................................5-155.6 ACP Calibration ........................................5-155.7 SNP System Calibration.............................5-15

6.0 S-Parameter Measurements .............. 6-16.1 Introduction ............................................. 6-16.2 1-Port Measurements ............................... 6-16.3 2-Port Measurements ............................... 6-16.4 Saving S-Parameter Data ...........................6-36.5 Recalling S-Parameter Data ...................... 6-3

7.0 Power Measurements ......................... 7-17.1 General .................................................... 7-17.2 Power Parameters .....................................7-17.3 Power Measurement Screen ......................7-37.4 Single Power Measurements ......................7-87.5 Power Sweep ............................................7-87.6 Bias Sweep ............................................... 7-107.7 VSWR Circle Measurements ......................7-107.8 Load Pull ...................................................7-127.9 Source Pull ............................................... 7-147.10 Harmonic Source/Load Tuning ................. 7-167.11 Optimum Search ...................................... 7-167.12 Sweep Plan ...............................................7-177.13 Setting Specifications ............................... 7-207.14 The User Functions ...................................7-217.15 Saving Measured Power Files ....................7-227.16 Displaying Measured Power Data .............7-227.17 Displaying Power Calibration Data .......... 7-227.18 Gt(s) and Delta_Gt ....................................7-227.19 Oscillator Measurements ...........................7-23

8.0 Intermodulation DistortionMeasurements ..................................... 8-1

8.1 General .................................................... 8-18.2 Intermod Measurements ............................8-18.3 Displaying Intermod Data ........................ 8-2

Section Title Page Section Title Page

Page 6: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2ii

Contents

MAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002

Section Title Page

9.0 Adjacent Channel PowerMeasurements ..................................... 9-1

9.1 General .................................................... 9-19.2 ACP Measurements ...................................9-19.3 Displaying ACP Data ............................... 9-1

10.0 Noise Measurements .......................... 10-110.1 General .................................................... 10-110.2 Swept Frequency ...................................... 10-210.3 Swept Bias ............................................... 10-710.4 Interactive Noise Measurement .................10-810.5 User Functions ..........................................10-1310.6 Saving Measured Noise Data ....................10-1410.7 Displaying Swept Noise Data ....................10-1410.8 Displaying Noise Calibration Data ............10-14

11.0 DC I-V Curve Measurement ................ 11-111.1 General .................................................... 11-111.2 Measurement Parameters ..........................11-111.3 Making the DC I-V Measurement ..............11-111.4 DC I-V Curve Display ...............................11-111.5 Saving Measured DC Data Files ............... 11-211-6 Recalling Measured DC Data Files ............11-2

12.0 Enhanced Graphics ............................ 12-112.1 Introduction ............................................. 12-112.2 Surfer Rectangular Graphical Display ........12-112.3 Surfer Contour Graphical Display .............12-2

13.0 Software Feedback ............................. 13-1

Appendix 1Running the SNPW Program inDemo Mode ......................................... A1-1

A1.1 General .................................................... A1-1A1.2 Program Startup ........................................A1-1A1.3 Calibration ............................................... A1-1A1.4 Measurement ............................................A1-2A1.5 Display .................................................... A1-4A1.6 Changing the Setup ...................................A1-5

Appendix 2Instrument Drivers Supplied .............. A2-1

A2.1 General .................................................... A2-1A2.2 GPIB Board ...............................................A2-1A2.3 GPIB Board/Card Part No.s (Nat’l Instruments) A2-1

Section Title Page

A2-4 Tuner Controller ........................................A2-1A2.5 Vector Network Analyzer ..........................A2-2A2.6 Noise Figure Meter ....................................A2-4A2.7 Noise Test Set ...........................................A2-4A2.8 RF Source (for Local Oscillator or

Power Source) ...........................................A2-5A2.9 Power Meter (for Output, Input or

Reflection) .................................................A2-10A2.10 Bias Supply ...............................................A2-14A2.11 Spectrum Analyzer ....................................A2-15A2-12 ACP Analyzer ............................................A2-17 A2-13 Old Bias Drivers ........................................A2-19

Appendix 3Programming Custom InstrumentDrivers and User Functions ............... A3-1

A3.1 General .................................................... A3-1A3.2 Source Code Structure ...............................A3-1A3.3 Data Structures ..........................................A3-2A3.4 Driver Development Process .....................A3-6A3.5 Procedure to Create a Developer Studio

Project to Work on a Driver ......................A3-7A3.6 Updating Custom Drivers to Work with New

Software Versions ......................................A3-8A3.7 Converting Drivers from Version 2.20

to Version 3.30 ........................................ A3-8

Appendix 4Theory of Load and Source PullMeasurement ....................................... A4-1

Appendix 5Theory of Noise Measurement .......... A5-1

Appendix 6Theory of Intermodulation DistortionMeasurements ..................................... A6-1

A6.1 Introduction ............................................. A6-1A6.2 Two-Tone Intermodulation Testing ............A6-1A6.3 Third Order Intercept Point ...................... A6-2A6.4 5th and 7th Order Intercept Points ............A6-3

Appendix 7SNP Standard Files ............................. A7-1

Page 7: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

Contents

iii

MAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 MT993-2

Illustrations

2-1 Typical Setup for Performing S-ParameterMeasurements ...........................................2-1

2-2 Typical Setup for PerformingNoise Measurements .................................2-2

2-3 Typical Setup for PerformingPower Measurements ............................... 2-2

2-4 Typical Setup for PerformingPower/Intermod Measurements .................2-2

2-5 Typical Setup for Performing ACPMeasurements ...........................................2-3

2-6 Typical Setup for Performing HarmonicTuning Measurements ...............................2-4

2-7 Typical Setup Using RF Switches to MeasureS-Parameters, Noise and Power with OneConnection ...............................................2-6

3-1 GPIB Device Template Setup ....................3-23-2 GPIB Board Template Setup, Advanced

Setting ...................................................... 3-3

4-1 Tuner Properties ........................................4-34-2 S-Parameter Properties ..............................4-34-3 Multiplexer S-Parameter Files ....................4-44-4 Bias System Setup .....................................4-44-5 Typical Instrument Properties ....................4-44-6 SNPW Instrument Editor ............................4-54-7 Bias Instrument Setup ............................... 4-74-8 SNPW Default System Files ...................... 4-84-9 Deembedding System Files ...................... 4-84-10 Text Figure Selection .................................4-84-11 Harmonic Tuning System Files ................. 4-94-12 Noise System Files ....................................4-94-13 Power System Files ....................................4-94-14 SNPW Default Directories ........................ 4-94-15 System Options Dialog ..............................4-104-16 DC Bias Details Setup ...............................4-114-17 Noise Options Dialog ...............................4-144-18 Power Options Dialog ...............................4-184-19 Intermod Options Dialog ..........................4-204-20 ACP Options Dialog ..................................4-224-21 User Options Dialog .................................4-244-22 Noise Source Editor, ENR Dialog ..............4-254-23 Noise Source Editor, Reflection

Coefficient Dialog .....................................4-26

4-24 Power Sensor, Efficiency, Loss Dialog .......4-274-25 Power Sensor Editor, Reflection

Coefficient Dialog .....................................4-284-26 Reference Plane Convention .....................4-304-27 Cascade S-Parameters Dialog ....................4-334-28 Un-Cascade S-Parameters Dialog ..............4-344-29 Display of Reversed S-Parameters .............4-354-30 Renormalize S-Parameters Dialog .............4-36

5-1 Tuner Orientation Convention DuringCharacterization ........................................5-1

5-2 Tuner Step Reflection RangeSetup Editor ...............................................5-2

5-3 Tuner Step Position RangeSetup Editor ...............................................5-4

5-4 Typical Setup for Performing NoiseMeasurements ...........................................5-7

5-5 Noise Calibration Display ........................ 5-85-6 Typical Setup for Performing

Power Measurements ............................... 5-95-7 Power Calibration .....................................5-115-8 Typical Setup for Performing

Power/Intermod Measurements .................5-12

6-1 Typical S-Parameter Display .....................6-2

7-1 Power Measurement Screen ......................7-47-2 Block Point Selection ............................... 7-57-3 Measurement Parameter

Selection Editor ........................................ 7-67-4 Swept Power Display ............................... 7-87-5 Load Pull Contour Display ........................7-117-6 Contour Display Setup Dialog ...................7-127-7 Harmonic Impedance Control Display ......7-157-8 Sweep Plan Setup Dialog ..........................7-157-9 Progressive Display During Sweep Plan

Measurement ............................................7-167-10 Sweep Plan Display Setup ........................ 7-177-11 Sweep Plan Swept Display ........................7-187-12 Sweep Plan Contour Display .....................7-197-13 Specification Editor ...................................7-19

8-1 Swept Intermod Display ............................8-2

Figure Title Page Figure Title Page

Page 8: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2iv

Contents

MAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002

10-1 Swept Noise Display .................................10-310-2 Noise Parameter Selection Display ............10-410-3 Noise Statistics Dialog ...............................10-610-4 Interactive Noise Measurement

Screen ...................................................... 10-910-5 Noise Parameter Measurement

Screen ...................................................... 10-11

11-1 DC I-V Curve Display ...............................11-2

12-1 Surfer Rectangular Display Dialog .............12-112-2 Surfer Rectangular Display ........................12-212-3 Surfer Contour Dialog ...............................12-212-4 Surfer Contour Options Dialog ................. 12-312-5 Surfer 2D Contour Display ........................12-412-6 Surfer 3D Contour Display ........................12-4

A6-1 Output Spectrum of Two-ToneIntermod Test ............................................A6-1

A6-2 Measurement of Third OrderIntercept Point ...........................................A6-2

Illustrations

Figure Title Page

Page 9: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

Contents

v

MAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 MT993-2

13-1 Software Feedback ....................................13-3

A3-1 Main Files for Each Driver Category ..........A3-1

Tables

Table Title Page

Page 10: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 11: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 1-1

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 This manual is provided with the followingMaury Microwave Corporation ApplicationSoftware Packages:

a. Model MT993A Power CharacterizationApplication.

b. Model MT993B Noise CharacterizationApplication.

c. Model MT993C Both Power and NoiseCharacterization Applications.

d. Model MT993D Intermodulation Distortionand Adjacent Channel Power MeasurementApplications. (This requires the MT993A orMT993C, since it is an extension of thepower characterization application.)

e. Model MT993D02 Oscillator characterization(This requires the MT993A or MT993C, sinceit is an extension of the power characterizationapplication.)

f. Model MT993F System Control. (Thisrequires the MT993A or MT993C, since it isan extension of the power characterizationapplication.)

g. Model MT993G DC I-V Curve measurementoption. (This requires the MT993A/B/C sinceit is an add-on option, not a stand-aloneprogram).

h. Model MT993H Harmonic Tuning meas-urement option. (This option requires theMT993A/C since it is an extension of thepower characterization application.)

i. Model MT993D01 Signal Synthesis. (Thisrequires the MT993A or MT993C, since it isan extension of the power characterizationapplication.)

j. Model MT993N01 No Tuner option limitsthe software to s-parameter, noise figure,and/or swept power measurements withouttuners.

k. Model MT993N07 Enhanced Graphics.

l. Model MT956D Fixture Version 3.1.

1.1.2 These software packages all use the MauryMicrowave Automated Tuner System (ATS), andadditional microwave instrumentation. Themanual describes the hardware requirements,and the installation and operation of theapplication program (SNPW).

1.2 Description

1.2.1 The SNPW program is an integrated interactiveprogram that uses network analyzers to measures-parameters (Model MT993A/B/C/D), theMaury Automated Tuner System (ATS) to findpower characteristics (Models MT993A/C/D),noise characteristics (Models MT993B/C), andintermodulation distortion and adjacent channelpower (MT993D) of devices.

1.2.2 The MT993A or MT993C software performsrapid and accurate power characterizationmeasurements using the ATS, an RF powersource, a bias supply, and one to three powermeters. It improves the accuracy and reduces thetedium involved compared to more traditionalmanual measurement methods. Refer toAppendix 4 for the basic theory of powermeasurements.

1.2.3 The MT993B or MT993C software performsrapid and accurate noise characterizationmeasurements using the ATS, a noise source, alocal oscillator (if needed), a bias supply, and anoise gain analyzer (noise figure meter). Thesoftware also allows the use of a noise figure testset. Refer to Appendix 5 for the basic theory ofnoise measurement.

1General Information

Page 12: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

1-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

1.2.4 The MT993C software is a combination of thepower and noise characterization applications.This feature speeds up the design process.

1.2.5 The MT993D software is an extension to theMT993A/C which adds intermodulationdistortion (IMD or intermod) and adjacentchannel power (ACP) measurement capability.Refer to Appendix 6 for the basic theory ofintermodulation distortion measurements.

1.2.6 The Model MT993D01 Signal Synthesis option isan extension to the MT993 A/C/D which adds theability to use custom I/Q modulation data forACP measurements. The I/Q data may becalculated for some common modulation types,or read from a file.

1.2.7 The Model MT993D02 Oscillator characterization isan extension to the MT993 A/C which adds oscillatormeasurements.

1.2.8 The Model MT993F System Control Optionallows the use of RF switches to measures-parameters, noise parameters, and power datawith one setup. This also allows complete in-situcalibrations.

1.2.9 The Model MT993G DC I-V Curve Option addsthe ability to do DC characterization in the formof I-V Curves.

1.2.10 The Model MT993H Harmonic Tuning Option isan extension to the MT993A/C which addsindependent control at harmonic frequencies.Refer to Appendix 4 for the basic theory of powermeasurement.

1.2.11 The MT993N01 Option limits the ability to makes-parameter, noise figure and/or swept powermeasurements without tuners. The noise figuremeasurement requires the user_nf user function.

1.2.12 The MT956D Fixture Software can be a stand-alone software product, or it may be an extensionto the MT993 Series software. As an extension,it provides a number of unique s-parametercalibration and measurement functions.

1.2.13 The MT993 Series application packages includeutilities to measure 1-port and 2-port s-para-meters using a variety of vector automaticnetwork analyzers. The editors for Noise Sourceand Power Sensor file creation automaticallymeasure and combine s-parameter data with therequired user entered data. Automatic andmanual tuner characterization (relating RFparameters to tuner positions) utilities take datafor later use by the software. These utilities allowfor embedding the data (reference plane shift tothe DUT reference plane) with provided modelsor models created by the user.

1.3 Hardware Key

A hardware key, Maury Model number MT993K,is supplied, and connects directly to the parallelprinter port on the computer. The software willnot operate without the hardware key installed.

☞ NOTE: The hardware keys are distinguished byserial numbers that have been programmed intothe keys. The serial number on the key should berecorded below by the user. Any correspon-dence regarding the software must include thisserial number.

Hardware Key SN __________.

Page 13: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 1-3

1.4 Computer Requirements

The MT993 series software is designed to rununder MS-Windows® on PC compatiblecomputers using a Pentium® II processor orbetter. A National Instruments GPIB 32-bitinterface card is required to communicate withthe instrumentation. See below for a listing ofapplicable interface cards:

A PCI-GPIB (Plug and Play) 32-bit GPIB cardfor Windows 2000/XP #778032-01. ForWindows® 98, use #777158-01

A PCMCIA-GPIB card, #777156-02 forWindows® 98 or #778034-02 for Windows2000/XP.

1.5 Equipment Requirements

The Maury MT993 series ATS PC softwarecurrently supports the following GPIB control-lable auxiliary equipment:

ATS Components (used with MT993A/B/C/D/H)

Maury MT986 Series Tuner ControllerMaury MT981 Series Automated TunersMaury MT982 Series Automated TunersMaury MT983 Series Automated TunersMaury MT984 Series Automated TunersMaury MT975 Series Automated TunersMaury MT977 Series Automated TunersMaury MT979 Series Automated TunersMaury MT999 Automated Harmonic Tuner

Network Analyzers (used with MT993A/B/C/D/H)

See Appendix 2 for network analyzerinstrument setup.

Vector receiver ( used with MT933A/C).

This is normally a vector network analyzerwith external sampler access.

See Appendix 2 for network analyzerinstrument setup.

RF Switch (used MT993F)

See Appendix 2 for RF switch controlinstrument setup.

RF Sources (used with MT993A/B/C/D/H)

See Appendix 2 for RF source instrumentsetup.

RF Sources (used with MT993B/C only)

If the HP8970B noise figure meter is used,then any of the SIB supported sources mayalso be used for noise measurements. SeeAppendix 2 for details.

Bias Instruments (used with MT993A/B/C/D/H)

Up to six bias supplies may be used. Voltageand Current measurement for each supplycan be done with the supply itself, or withoptional voltmeters or current meters.

See Appendix 2 for bias setup.

Power Meters (used with MT993A/C/D only)

See Appendix 2 for power meter instrumentsetup.

Noise Instruments (used with MT993B/C only)

See Appendix 2 for noise instrument setup.

Spectrum Analyzers (used with MT993D only)

See Appendix 2 for spectrum analyzerinstrument setup.

Page 14: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

1-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

ACP Analyzers (used with MT993D only)

See Appendix 2 for adjacent channel powerinstrument setup.

Frequency Meter (used with MT993A/C/D02)

See Appendix 2 Frequency Meter instrumentsetup.

Sample source code for each type of driver isprovided (except the tuner controller driver) sothat additional drivers may be easily written.New drivers must be written in Microsoft VisualC++. See Appendix 3 for details.

1.6 Software Limits

The following is a listing of software imposedlimits on the number of frequencies, powerlevels and other elements of the program. Allfrequency ranges may have non-uniform stepsizes; however, the power range used in thepower sweep must have a uniform step size.

Maximum number of calibrated networkanalyzer frequencies: 801

Maximum number of S-parametercalibration frequencies: 801

Maximum number of tunerfrequencies: 51

Maximum number of noise calibrationfrequencies: 51

Maximum number of power calibrationfrequencies: 51

Maximum number of S-parameter meas-urement frequencies: 801

Maximum number of noise measurementfrequencies: 51

Maximum number of power measurementfrequencies: 51

Maximum number of power levels in a powersweep: 101

Maximum number of ENR frequencies: 101Maximum number of noise source

reflection coefficient frequencies: 801Maximum number of power sensor

efficiency frequencies: 101Maximum number of power sensor

reflection coefficient frequencies: 801

Other limits are:

Maximum number of contours: 124Maximum calculation resolution for

contours: 180Maximum number of noise or gain

circles: 120

The maximum number of characterized tunerpositions at any frequency is limited by availableRAM and disk space. These are dynamicallyallocated as the tuners are characterized or readfrom a file.

Page 15: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 2-1

2.1 General

2.1.1 The SNPW program automates measurement ofs-parameter, noise, power, intermod, harmonicand Adjacent Channel Power (ACP) parametersof RF/microwave devices using the MauryAutomated Tuner System. The excellentrepeatability, low loss, and well-behavedresponse of the tuners allows this wide range ofapplications.

The SNPW program also automates DC I-Vcharacterization of devices. The ability toproperly terminate the DUT at RF frequenciescan be very important during DC tests, and theautomated bias equipment is typically alreadypart of the system.

2.1.2 The five types of RF measurements (s-parameters,noise, power, intermod and ACP) can be madefrom within the same program if all of the optionsare installed. However, they require separatesetups as shown in Figures 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4 and2-5. A basic power setup with harmonic load/source pull is shown in Figure 2-6.

The setups may be combined using RF switches.This is shown in Figure 2-7.

The DC measurements may be done with any ofthe setups.

2.1.3 Reference Planes

Before setting up the system, it is important to layout all of the system components, in order todecide on the reference planes for each majorblock diagram block. Include all adaptersneeded to connect blocks together.

A major consideration is to provide the mostaccurate network analyzer calibrations possiblefor measuring each block. Choose the connectorinterface for compatibility with the most accuratevector network analyzer (VNA) cal kits, andmake the blocks insertable if possible (i.e. male tofemale for sexed connector types). For example,if a fixture has female to female, connectors, youcould add a male-male adapter on one side tomake the fixture male-female.

2Introduction to the System

Figure 2-1. Typical Setup for Performing S-Parameter Measurements

Page 16: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

2-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 2-2. Typical Setup for Performing Noise Measurements

Figure 2-4. Typical Setup for Performing Power/Intermod Measurements

Figure 2-3. Typical Setup for Performing Power Measurements

Page 17: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 2-3

2.1.4 Calibration Approaches

The two basic approaches to calibrating thesystem are 1) pre-characterize all system blocksseparately, and 2) in-situ calibration.

The pre-characterization method minimizes thetest equipment that must be tied up with thesystem, and provides some flexibility to switchblocks in and out without re-calibration.

The in-situ calibration (called SNP Cal) uses theSystem Control option, and requires a vectornetwork analyzer (VNA) to be permanentlyconnected to the system. However, it allows theentire system to be calibrated without breakingany critical connections. This leaves fewerpossibilities for connection error or changesbecause of cable bending, etc.

A hybrid approach is to do the time-consumingcalibrations of stable components (tuners andpossibly fixtures) and use the SNP Cal foreverything else. This provides a fast calibrationwhile maintaining the benefits of the in-situcalibraiton, minimizing disconnections andmovement of unstable components like cables,etc.

2.1.5 System Components to Characterize

The following components need to be char-acterized, regardless of the calibration approachselected:

a. Tuners. The complete 2-port s-parameters,as a function of tuner position, are recordedfor both the source and load tuners. Biastees, adapters, or other 2-port componentscascaded with the tuners may be lumpedwith the tuners so all mismatches and lossesmay be taken into account.

b. Noise Source. The excess noise ratio (ENR)and the reflection coefficients in the hot andcold states vs. frequency are recorded. Thisis needed only for noise measurements.

c. Output Power Sensor. The sensor efficiency,loss of an optional attenuator, and thereflection coefficient versus frequency arerecorded. This is needed only for power,intermod or ACP measurements.

d. Thru. The thru is used for calibration in bothnoise and power. It should install in the sameplace as the DUT, and the reference plane ofthe S-parameters should be the same as theDUT. It does not need to be a perfect thru,since the measured s-parameters allowaccounting for its mismatch and loss.

e. Fixture. This is optional, but is usefulwhen the desired DUT reference planeis not at a connector interface. Thes-parameters of each half of the fixturefrom the connector plane to the DUT plane

Figure 2-5. Typical Setup for Performing ACP Measurements

Page 18: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

2-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Fig

ure

2-6

. T

ypic

al

Se

tup

fo

r P

erf

orm

ing

Ha

rmo

nic

Tu

nin

g M

ea

sure

me

nts

Page 19: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 2-5

can be stored in separate files. This allowsaccurate calibration of the networkanalyzer at well-defined connectorinterfaces, while providing the final dataat the DUT planes.

These fixture files are not needed if thebuilt-in models for the Maury TransistorTest Fixture (TTF) are used. They are alsonot needed if the network analyzer is alwayscalibrated at the desired DUT plane,including the tuner characterization stageand the thru and DUT s-parametermeasurements.

f. Input and Output S-Parameter Blocks. Theseare optional, but are useful to characterizeblock diagram components separately fromthe tuners. Typical components that might beincluded could be adapters, bias tees,attenuators, or filters.

g. Multiplexer S-Parameter Blocks. These arerequired to do harmonic tuning. One 2-ports-parameter file is required for each paththrough the multiplexer that is used(fundamental, 2nd harmonic, and 3rdharmonic). Multiplexers can be used oneither the source, load, or both.

2.1.6 The system configuration is also normally savedin a file. This file includes the system file names,instrument descriptions, and measurementoptions to be set up once, and then easilyrecalled. Many configuration files can be savedto cover different applications or user pref-erences, if desired.

2.1.7 Before real measurements can be made, all of thesetup files mentioned above must be created.The software provides a variety of menus andeditors to do this, and this is covered in detail inSection 4. A step by step overview of the processis also given later in Section 5.

2.2 Text Conventions Used

The following conventions are used within thismanual to describe keystroke and data entryconventions:

a. When you are instructed to “Press”, simplytype the indicated key or key combination.

b. When you are instructed to "Select", selectan item from the indicated menu or dialog.

c. Items shown within angle brackets < > andwhich include a capital letter, such as<F1>, <ESC> or <Calibrate> may indicateeither a key, a menu item, or a button in adialog box. When you are instructed to"Press", it indicates the key on the keyboardwhich has those specific letters printed onit. When you are instructed to "Select", itindicates a menu item.

d. Items shown within angle brackets < > andwhich begin with a lower case letter, suchas <down arrow> and <up arrow>, indicatethe key on which the described symbol isprinted or the key that performs thedescribed action.

e. Items shown within square brackets [ ],such as [d:] or [path], are optional itemsand may be ignored if the default operationis desired.

2.3 Menu Structure Overview

2.3.1 Menu Bar

The SNPW software has many different views,and each view has it's own menu. The menu barshowing at any time will be associated with theactive view. The block diagram view has themain menu, so it is the starting point for doingmost of the major actions.

☞ NOTE: Some menus also have tool bars forfaster access to some of the most common menuitems.

The <File> menu available in most viewstypically will apply to file and print functionswhich are specific to that view. For example, the<File> menu in the block diagram view handlesconfiguration files and will print the blockdiagram, whereas the <File> menu in the sweptpower display handles just the swept power filesand will print the swept display.

Page 20: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

2-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

The <Edit> menu available in most viewstypically includes editing of the label, andcopying the data from the view to the clipboard.This data can then be pasted into other Windowsapplications.

The <View> menu available in most viewsrelates to displaying data. This menu in the blockdiagram view is used to recall data from files ormemory for display. This menu will adjust thedisplay format in most of the data displays.

The <Window> menu available in most viewscontrols the display of multiple windows. Thebackground color of most data displays can alsobe changed here.

☞ NOTE: The background color in most views canbe toggled from black to white from the<Window> menu. However, the print functionswill always use a white background.

The <Help> menu available in most viewsprovides access to help topics. The <About>item gives information about the softwarerevision, serial number, and installed options.

Figure 2-7. Typical Setup Using RF Switches to Measure S-Parameters,Noise and Power With One Connection

☞ NOTE: If a menu item is displayed with a graycolor, it is inactive and cannot be selected. Thisis usually because some other action must bedone first to make it active, or it is part of anoption which was not purchased.

2.3.2 Popup Menus

Many views have popup menus that are accessedby a right click on a display object, such as theSmith chart. This will typically provide functionssuch as zoom or selecting points. The powermeasurement control screen is an example.

2.3.3 Active Text

Some views have text that will highlight when themouse is moved over it. Typically, this will besomething like a scale value or formattingvariable. Left clicking the text while it ishighlighted will change it or bring up a dialog.

2.4 Getting Help

On-line help is available at many places withinthe program. It is accessed by pressing<Help><Help Topics>.

Page 21: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 2-7

2.5 Demo Mode

A demonstration mode is built into the softwareto simplify learning how to use the software. Thismode is set when the factory default con-figuration is selected, or can be turned on or offin the setup options dialog box.

When the demo mode is set, the program will nottalk to any instruments, but will use a built-insystem model to generate simulated data. Thesimulated data is sufficiently realistic to give afeel for the program operation.

☞ NOTE: The configuration file, demo.cfg, whichis provided, is already setup to use all of thedemonstration data files.

It is recommended that new users start with thedemo mode to learn what to expect from theprogram before starting real measurements. SeeAppendix 1 for details.

Page 22: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 23: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 3-1

3Installing the Maury ATS Application Software

3.1 General

3.1.1 The Maury ATS Application Software Installprogram copies the Maury ATS ApplicationSoftware programs and directory structure toyour hard disk. Before you can start usingMaury ATS Application Software, you mustinstall the software using the Setup Programfound on Master Distribution CD-ROM.

3.1.2 In this chapter you will learn how to set upMaury ATS Application Software on your harddisk. You will also learn how to start MauryATS Application Software and what to do nextto put Maury ATS Application Software towork for you.

3.2 System Requirements

3.2.1 To use Maury ATS Application Software youneed the following:

a. The master Maury ATS Application Soft-ware distribution CD-ROM and HardwareKey.

b. A personal computer operating MS-Windows® 98, 2000, or XP with aPentium® II processor or better, 64 mega-bytes (MB) of random access memory(RAM) minimum (128 MB recommended),20 MB of free disk space (40 recom-mended), and a CD-ROM drive.

c. The computer must have an available PCIslot and parallel port.

☞ NOTE: Minimum RAM and hard disk spacerequirements assume no optional componentsor network installation.

d. A VGA (800 x 600) or compatible, videographics adapter with 16MB of Video Ram.

e. National Instrument GPIB interface board.This may be either a PCI-GPIB card or aPCMCIA card.

☞ NOTE: See Appendix 2.

f. A Microsoft® Mouse, or compatible,pointing device.

3.3 Setting Up the National InstrumentsGPIB Card

3.3.1 Install National Instruments Softwareand Configure Hardware.

Follow National Instruments directions toinstall their Windows® 32-Bit GPIB software(Version 2.00 or later). Be sure to use theirsoftware to test the installation beforeproceeding.

3.3.2 Modify the National Instruments DefaultSettings.

☞ NOTE: The following details are for windows®98. Access to these setup dialogs will vary,depending on the operating system in use.

Right click on “My Computer” and then select“properties”. Select the Device Manager tab,and then with “National Instruments GPIBInterfaces” highlighted, select properties.Activate the “Device Templates” tab. You willneed to modify the settings for Dev1 throughDev30. Change Dev1 through Dev30 settingsby adding check marks to “Terminate Read onEOS”, and “Set EOI with EOS on Write”. Alsochange the EOS byte from “0” to “10” for alldevices. Modify Dev17 through Dev30 to useInterface “GPIB0” and set the “GPIB address”to correlate with the “Device Name”. SeeFigure 3-1 for examples of before and after.

The above changes were for each device, youwill now need to make changes to the “Board”settings as follows:

Page 24: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

3-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 3-1. GPIB Device Template Setup

3.4 Installing Maury ATS Software UnderWindows® 98/2000/XP

3.4.1 Software Installation

☞ NOTE: Reboot computer just before beginning.

CD-ROM D: drive example:

a. Insert SNPW CD-ROM into CD-ROMdrive of computer.

b. Start Setup by selecting:

StartRunD:\SetupOK

c. Follow the instructions of the installationscreen.

Right click on “My Computer” and then select“properties”. Select the Device Manager Tab,and then click the + (plus) in front of the“National Instruments GPIB Interfaces”.Highlight the expanded item and chooseproperties. Select the “NI-488.2 Settings” tab.Verify that the “Interface Name” is “GPIB0”and that “System controller” is checked. Also,check the first three “Termination Methods”,and set the “EOS” byte to 10.

Now select the “Advanced” button andchange/verify the following settings: “BusTiming” = 2 µsec, “Parallel Poll Duration” =default, “Cable Length for HS-488” = off. Turnoff (uncheck) the following: “Automatic SerialPolling”, “Assert REN when SC”, “CICProtocol”, and “Demand Mode DMA”.Click “OK”. See Figure 3-2.

You are now ready to install the Maury ATSApplication Software.

Page 25: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 3-3

Figure 3-2. GPIB Board Template Setup, Advanced Setting.

Power Sensor (.PM)Load pull (.LP)Source pull (.SP)Swept power (.SWP)Sweep Plan (.SPL)

Configuration files from past releases (startingwith Version 2.00) may be read in and converted.The path portions of the driver file names willbe optionally stripped to avoid using drivers fromthe old directory.

3.4.4 Starting Maury ATS ApplicationSoftware

After you have installed your Maury ATSApplication software, you can start theapplication. Click <Start> <Programs><Maury Automated Measurement> <Snpw>.(This is the default location used in theinstallation.)

3.4.2 Connecting the Hardware Key

Install the Hardware Key to the parallel portof your computer, with the end marked“Computer” connected directly to the parallelport. An existing printer can be reconnected tothe other end of the key.

3.4.3 Compatibility With Files FromPrevious Release

The following file types (with extension) maybe safely copied to the appropriate directoriesin the new structure:

Tuner characterization (.TUN)S-parameter (.S1P and .S2P)Noise Source (.NS)Noise Measurement (.SF and .SB)

Page 26: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 27: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-1

4.1 Overview of the Setup Process

4.1.1 This section outlines the various steps required toprepare the system for use and which section touse for detailed instructions. Use this as a checklist and guide when setting up the system for thefirst time.

4.1.2 All software options require the same basic steps:

a. Install Software per Section 3.0.

b. The recommended way to initially set up anew configuration is to choose <Default>from the <File> menu. This will clear theblock diagram and file specifications. Thishelps to ensure that you don't accidentallyuse demo data in your setup.

c. Define the instruments you are going to use.See Section 4.3.

d. Specify where to save and recall calibrationand measurement data files. See Section 4.4.

e. Specify special measurement options. SeeSection 4.5.

☞ NOTE: Set Demo Mode to “No” for real data.

f. Decide on the reference planes. Setup thebench with all adapters, cables, etc., andchoose the planes that will divide each of theblocks in the block diagram. Since systemaccuracy depends on s-parameter calibrationsduring the setup phase, choose planes atconnectors that will produce the mostaccurate calibrations. Then separate theblocks at these reference planes forcharacterization of the support data files.

☞ NOTE: Try to select reference planes thatproduce insertable blocks whenever possible.This means that the connectors on oppositeends will be either sexless or of the oppositesex from each other. Otherwise, non-insertables-parameter calibrations will be required, andthat adds more chances for errors and takeslonger to do.

4Setting Up the System Configuration

g. Create the following support data files (ifneeded):

1. Tuner Characterization files (MT993A/B/C/D/H). See Section 5.1.

2. Thru s-parameter files (MT993A/B/C/D/H). See Sections 5.2 and 6.3.

3. Fixture files (optional for deembedding).See Sections 4.8 and 6.3.

4. Input and Output s-Parameter blocks(Optional). See Section 4.4.2 and 6.3.

5. Noise Source file (MT993B/C only). SeeSection 4.6.

6. Power Sensor file (MT993A/C/D/H only).See Section 4.7.

7. DUT s-parameter files (MT993A/Doptional, MT993B/C required). SeeSections 4.8 and 6.3.

8. Multiplexer s-parameter files (MT993Honly). See Section 4.8.3 and 6.3.

h. Tell the system the names and location ofthese support files as required. See Section4.4.

i. Save the system information. See Section 4.9.

j. After verifying the proper system setup,calibrate the system. See Section 5.2 forS-parameter, Section 5.3 for Noise, Section5.4 for Power, Section 5.5 for Intermod, andSection 5.6 for Adjacent Channel Power.

k. Make measurements. See Section 6 forS-parameter, Section 7 for Power, Section 8for Intermod, Section 9 for Adjacent ChannelPower, Section 10 for Noise, and Section 11for DC-IV Curves.

4.2 System Configuration

4.2.1 The System Configuration

The SNPW program allows the user to use avariety of instruments and to set up options for the

Page 28: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

specific application. For convenience, a varietyof default Windows path names and filenamescan also be entered. This system configurationcan be saved at any time to avoid repetitiveentries. This feature can also be used to savedifferent configurations for different users orapplications.

Configuration files are used to store thesystem's setup information. This includes theinstrument definitions, default Windows pathnames and filenames, system options, and avariety of other calibration, measurement, anddisplay parameters.

After either saving or recalling a configurationfile, the filename will become the new start upconfiguration filename.

☞ NOTE: Be sure to save desired configurations,otherwise they will be lost as soon as theprogram is stopped.

4.2.2 Selecting a System Configuration atProgram Start-up

When the program starts, the last configurationfile either saved or read will be loaded. Thissimplifies the entry after the system has been setup. The current configuration filename will beshown in the caption of the block diagram view.

To clear the block diagram and setup files, select<File><Default>. This will initialize all of thesystem variables to a fixed starting point. To setup a demonstration mode, select <File><Open>and then select demo.cfg with the browser. Thisis useful for learning the flow of the SNPWprogram.

☞ NOTE: It is recommended that new users startwith the demo mode to learn what to expectfrom the program before starting real measure-ments. See Section 2.6 and Appendix 1.

4.2.3 Saving Configuration Files

The current system configuration settings maybe saved anytime before the program is exited.

To save the active configuration, select theBlock Diagram View as the active view, thenselect either <Save> or <Save As> on the<File> menu. If <Save As> was selected, entera filename when prompted without anyextension. The software automaticallyappends “.cfg” to configuration filenameswhen they are saved.

4.2.4 Recalling Configuration Files

A previously saved configuration can berecalled any time while the program isrunning. Select the Block Diagram view as theactive view, then select <File> from the SNPWMenu, then select <Open>.

When prompted, select a filename. Thedefault extension is ".cfg".

☞ NOTE: See Section 4.2.2 for details onselecting a configuration at program start-up.

4.2.5 Printing The Configuration

Select <File> from SNPW Main Menu (withthe Block Diagram view active), then select<Print > to print the block diagram.

4.2.6 The Setup Menu

Most of the system configuration is done from theSetup Menu. This includes all of the instrumentdefinitions, default filenames, and major systemoptions. The Setup Menu provides editors for theNoise Source files and Power Sensor files, andalso does the tuner characterization.

When the SNPW program is first installed, set upthe configuration in the Setup Menu and save itin a file before starting any measurements.

☞ NOTE: Although many default values can beset up in the Setup Menu, they can also bemodified during the running of the program.This includes items like tuner filenames, biasvalues, or ambient temperature. Other defaultvalues, such as the display parameters andscales, can only be set during the running ofthe program.

Page 29: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-3

4.3 Editing the Block Diagram

4.3.1 General

The configuration setup is now displayedvisually as shown in section 2. Three standardmeasurement configurations, s-parameter,Noise and Power, can now be selected fromthe <Setup> pulldown menu. These threeconfigurations are all saved in the sameconfiguration file.

All three block diagrams will be combinedinto the SNP System Block Diagram if the RFswitches are turned on. See Figure 2-7. (SNPmeans S-parameters, Noise, and Power.) Thissetup allows all measurement types to be donein the same setup.

T h e p o r t c o n v e n t i o n s o f t h e v a r i o u sS - p a r a m e t e r b l o c k s c a n b e d i s p l a y e db y s e t t i n g "Show RF port numbers" toyes in the <Setup><Options><System>. SeeFigure 4-15.

Each block diagram configuration setupincludes a descriptive text label. This allowsthe user to quickly identify the setup. Thislabel text is entered from the <Edit><Label>pulldown menu.

4.3.2 Editing Block Diagram Components

The configuration setup can be modified byeither double clicking on an icon or addingequipment from the <Setup> pulldown menu.

Double clicking on a tuner icon brings up thetuner properties control. See Figure 4-1.

Double clicking on an S-parameter icon bringsup the S-parameter properties control. SeeFigure 4-2.

Double clicking on a harmonic multiplexericon brings up the Multiplexer propertiescontrol. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-1. Tuner Properties

Figure 4-2. S-Parameter Properties

Page 30: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-3. Multiplexer S-Parameter Files

Figure 4-4. Bias System Setup

Figure 4-5. Typical Instrument Properties

Double clicking on the Bias System iconbrings up the bias system setup control. SeeFigure 4-4.

Double clicking on an instrument icon bringsup the Instrument controls. For example,double clicking on the VNA in the standards-parameter Block Diagram brings up the VNAdriver control. See Figure 4-5.

S-parameter blocks can be added on the input ofthe source tuner and the output of the load tuner.This makes it easier to change bias tees,attenuators, etc. These s-parameter blocks areadded from the <Setup> <Default Files/

Page 31: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-5

Directories> <Deembedding> control. SeeFigure 4-10.

4.4 Setting Up the Instruments

The SNPW Instrument Editor is used to specifythe system instruments. From the SNPW Menu,select <Setup>, then <Instruments...> to start theInstrument Editor shown in Figure 4-6. For eachrequired instrument, set up the model, driver,GPIB address, and time out value. First, click toselect an instrument. Next, edit each item in thedialog. Click <Browse> to browse for the driverfilename. See Section 4.4.1 for details onselecting the bias instruments and setting up thebias conditions.

☞ NOTE: Instrument properties may also beedited by clicking on the icon in the blockdiagram, if it is already there.

Clicking on the <Test> button in the instrumentproperties dialog will start the driver in a stand-alone mode. In this mode, the driver will createa window with some descriptive information,

and a test menu. This is useful for checking thecapability of a driver, or testing the operation ofa single instrument.

☞ NOTE: To see the model numbers that aresupported by the driver, click the <Test> but-ton, and select <Find> from the test menu.

☞ NOTE: Set the model number to “none” for anyinstrument category that is not in the setup. It isalso good practice to avoid having unused in-struments connected to the GPIB. When themodel is set to "none", the item is removedfrom Block diagram. To get it back, go to<Setup>.

☞ NOTE: The term driver refers to the execut-able file which drives the particular instru-ment. This will normally be an .EXE file in thesubdirectory DRIVERS. Due to the potentialcomplexity of bias systems, bias supplies andmonitors are programmed from the single ex-ecutable file \bias.exe. This file then callsuser-selected instruments from a list of *.dllfiles.

Figure 4-6. SNPW Instrument Editor

Page 32: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

A detailed listing of the Maury supplied drivers,along with critical setup information, can befound in Appendix 2. The model numbers andtime-out values are typed in or selected from alist, and the driver is most easily selected bybrowsing. The GPIB address should be the sameas the address set inside the actual instruments,and this must be unique for each instrument.

☞ NOTE: If a desired instrument driver is notavailable, a custom driver for that specificinstrument may be written. Appendix 3 de-fines how to write such a driver.

The “USER” Group of instruments can be setupfor special requirements. This group will not beused by the main program except to initialize thedriver names and to pass the setup information toeach driver.

☞ NOTE: After setting up the instruments, besure to save the system configuration so it canbe recalled in future measurement sessions.

4.4.1 Setting Up the Bias System

Click on <Bias System> in the Instrument Editorto bring up the Bias System Setup dialog (seeFigure 4-4).

Bias Settings:

The bias mode, values, and other detailsmay be set here or in the System Optionseditor. Click on details to bring up theentry dialog. For the first time user, it isrecommended that these settings be enteredin the Options editor since both dialogsare of equal priority, and changes madelater will be reflected here. See Section4.6.2 and Figure 4-16 for entry details.

Bias Set/Read Delay (mSec):

If the system requires time to stabilize aftersetting or before reading a bias value,enter the delay time here.

Bias Instruments:

Click on <Details> next to a specified bias

(Output, Input, etc.) to bring up theinstrument selection dialog (See Figure4-7). Each selection includes a bias supplyand any included meters. Click browse tobring up the file listing for the individualinstrument drivers. Note that these are*.dll files located in the Snpw\driversfolder.

Bias System Driver:

The bias system is operated by a singleoverall driver, bias.exe. This driver willthen call the selected DLL files for eachbias instrument. This allows anycombination of bias instruments to be usedwith the one bias driver.

Enabling the Bias:

To add the bias system to the block diagram,check the <Enable> box. Unchecking the<Enable> box will remove the bias systemfrom the block diagram.

If the system is to make real measurements,make certain the <Enable> box is checked.

4.5 Setting Up the Default Files and Directories

From the SNPW Menu, select <Setup>, then<Default Files/Directories> to start the propertysheet. Supply the requested information, then exitby clicking <OK>.

☞ NOTE: This property sheet should be usedwhenever new system data files are created. Besure to save changes per Section 4.2.

Windows filename and path conventionsshould be followed, except that no extensionshould be entered, as the program will adddefault extensions automatically. If anextension is included, the program will use it,but if it’s non-standard, it may be difficult tofind later.

Many times, when prompted to enter a filename, a default file name or directory is pre-

Page 33: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-7

Figure 4-7. Bias Instrument Setup

typed onto the entry line. This default entrycan be edited, or click the Browse button. Thedefault filenames and directories are set up inthe configuration editor to avoid retyping thesame directory/file name repeatedly.

Click on the appropriate tab in the propertysheet to set up the following:

4.5.1 System Files

Used for listing and reviewing the name andlocation of the tuner files and calibration thrudata file. See Figure 4-8.

4.5.2 Deembedding Files

Used to set up the 2-port s-parameter blocksfor deembedding. See Figure 4-9.

Input Fixture:

This selects the s-parameter block on theinput side of the DUT. Click the Changebutton to bring up the selection dialog. SeeFigure 4-10. First, select whether it is a

Transistor Test Fixture (TTF) model, a file,or NONE. If it is a TTF model, select fromthe pulldown list. If a 2-port s-parameterfile, use the browse button to find the file.See Section 4.9 for more information onfixture files.

Output Fixture:

This selects the s-parameter block on theoutput side of the DUT. A model or file isselected the same way as the input fixture.

Input S-parameters:

This is a 2-port s-parameter block on theinput side of the fundamental source tuner.Select the file using the Browse button.

Output S-parameters:

This is a 2-port s-parameter block on theoutput side of the fundamental load tuner.Select the file using the Browse button.

Page 34: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

4.5.3 Harmonic Tuning Files

This sets the filename and paths for themultiplexer and termination s-parameter filesfor the harmonic tuners. See Figure 4-11.

4.5.4 Noise Files

This sets the filename and paths for the noisesource and noise receiver input s-parameterfiles. See Figure 4-12.

4.5.5 Power Files

This sets the filename and paths for the powersensors and RF source output s-parameterfiles. See Figure 4-13.

4.5.6 Default Directories

This sets the default paths for variouscategories of files. See Figure 4-14.

4.6 Selecting Setup Options

From the SNPW Menu, select <Setup>, then<Options> to bring up the options propertysheet with five tabs (System, Noise, Power,Intermod, ACP, and User).

4.6.1 System Options

This dialog is used to setup the options used by allapplications. See Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-9. Deembedding System Files

Figure 4-8. SNPW Default System Files

Figure 4-10. Test Fixture Selection

Page 35: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-9

Figure 4-12. Noise System Files

Figure 4-13. Power System FilesFigure 4-11. Harmonic Tuning System Files

Figure 4-14. SNPW Default Directories

Page 36: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-10 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Demo Mode:

Select <Yes> to allow the program to runwithout any of the equipment. Calibrationand measurment data are simulated.

Select <No> to make real measurements. Allspecified equipment must be present andconnected to the GPIB.

☞ CAUTION: Set Demo Mode to “No” for realdata.

Show RF Port Numbers:

This controls the s-parameter port conven-tions display on configuration block diagrams.

Select <Yes> to display the port numbers.

Figure 4-15. System Options Dialog

Select <No> to turn off the port numberdisplay.

Reflection Format:

Select either reflection coefficient orimpedance as the format for reflectiondata used in various measurement anddisplay screens.

Normalization Zo (Ohms):

Enter the normalization impedance usedfor the Smith charts in the variousmeasurement and display screens. Thedefault is 50 Ohms.

Page 37: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-11

S-parameter Mode:

If set to <Online VNA>, RF switchesare used in the block diagram, ands-parameters, such as those required fornoise meaasurements, are read directlyfrom the VNA. The MT993f SystemControl Option is required for this mode.

If set to <Use Files>, the S-parametersmust be measured off-line, stored, andwill be read from a file when needed bythe program.

Pre-match Tuner Location:

If a pre-matching is employed, this optionsets the location of the pre-matching tuner.

Bias Settings:

This option establishes the bias mode,quiescent bias, bias limits and otherparameters of the bias system. Click on<Details> to bring up the DC Bias Setupdialog box (see figure 4-16) and refer tosection 4.6.2 for an explanation of the biasoptions.

Spectrum Analyzer:

Select the method of establishing theresolution bandwidth and videobandwidth of the spectrum analyzer.

Figure 4-16. DC Bias Details Setup

Page 38: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-12 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Select <Auto> and the optimum settingconsistent with the scan width and sweepspeed settings is determined auto-matically. This usually provides fairly fastmeasurements, but may not provide thebest dynamic range. Typically, this modewill reduce the bandwidth as the tonespacing and span ratio are reduced.

Select <Fixed> and enter a value in kHz tooverride the automatic setting. A smallervalue lowers the noise floor and providesbetter dynamic range and accuracy, butalso increases the measurement time.

The spectrum analyzer setup string is usedwith some drivers to specify special setupconditions. To see what text is expectedby a driver (or if it’s even used), click thetest button for the instrument, and read thecomments in the stand-alone window forthat driver.

☞ NOTE: If the spectrum analyzer measurementis slowed by a small resolution bandwidthsetting, it may be necessary to increase thespectrum analyzer time-out via the instrumenteditor (see Section 4.4).

Vector Receiver:

If a vector receiver is used, select themeasurements to be made.

The vector receiver is normally a VectorNetwork Analyzer (VNA) with sampleraccess, connected into the system withcouplers. The incident signal is alwaysconnected to the reference channel. If thereflected channel is connected, DUT inputreflection coefficient may be measured. Ifthe transmission channel is connected,then transmission phase is measured. Thisallows AM to PM conversion to bemeasured as part of a power sweep.

VNA Setup:

The operational settings of the vectornetwork analyzer used for s-parametersmeasurements are established from thisblock. Select <Auto> to use the VNAdefault settings. Select <Specify> andenter the control settings to override thedefaults.

4.6.2 DC Bias Setup

Click on <Details> in the "Bias Settings"section of the <Setup>, <Options>, <System>dialog box to bring up the following options(see Figure 4-16):

Bias Mode, Specify:

Select what bias values are going to bespecified. Choices are: V_out, I_out; V_out,V_in; V_out, I_in; V_out only; and None.These are designated Bias Modes 1 through4, respectively. (None is mode zero.)

Input Bias Control:

This option is applicable only to bias mode1 and determines whether input voltage orcurrent is swept to establish the selectedoutput current. In bias modes 2 and 3,voltage and current, respectively, are theonly choices. The option is inactive in biasmode 4 (no input bias) or if the modeselected is none (no bias applied).

Move to 50 ohms to set bias:

Select <Yes> to move all tuners to 50 ohmsbefore applying bias.

Select <No> to leave the tuners at theircurrent positions.

Select Quiescent Bias:

Enter the default bias values. These valuesmay be changed in the Bias Settings box inthe System Options dialog box.

Page 39: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-13

Bias Limits:

The bias limits should be set to valueslarger than the expected bias to avoidinterference with the normal bias oper-ation, but low enough to protect the DUT.These limits are set for bias parameters thatare not directly controlled by the specifiedbias values. For example, if input andoutput voltages are specified, the inputand output currents are not set directly;therefore, current limits are set to preventaccidental burn-out of the DUT.

The bias limits that apply depend upon thebias mode and the type of input bias control.The first limit is for output current. Thesecond limit is for input current when aninput voltage is specified or for inputvoltage when an input current is specified.

Bias Input Range:

The bias input range applies only in biasmode 1 (V_out, I_out). The values thatapply will be displayed only if this mode isselected. In bias mode 1, the input biaswill initialize at the start value and rampup until the selected output current isreached; however, the ramp up will beterminated if the input bias reaches thestop value even if the selected outputcurrent has not yet been reached. Theinput bias range is displayed in volts ormilliamps depending upon whether theselected input bias control is voltage orcurrent, respectively.

Auxiliary Bias:

Enter the bias values for any auxiliarysupplies required by the DUT (e.g., amulti-stage DUT requiring different biaslevels at each stage).

Bias Setting Sequence:

Enter the turn-on sequence for the variousbias supplies.

Bias Sweep Variable:

Select the variable for swept biasmeasurements. The choice is limited to theparameters specified by the selected biasmode; for example, in bias mode 1, selecteither V_out or I_out.

4.6.3 Noise Options

To set up the system conditions for the noisecharacterization application, click on the<Noise> tab in the <Setup> <Options> dialogbox. This will bring up the noise options dialogbox (see figure 4-17).

Ambient Temp. Celsius:

Enter the temperature of the tuners, biastees, fixture, and other componentsbetween the noise source and the noisereceiver reference planes (typically,ambient temperature). This temperatureis used to calculate the noise contrib-ution from the losses of these systemcomponents.

IF Freq:

If frequency conversion is required totranslate the measurement frequency towithin the range of the noise figure meter,select a frequency consistent with thesideband selection (see below). If upper(USB) or lower (LSB) single sideband isselected, the IF must be relatively large(usually several hundred MHz) to insurethat the sideband filter does not overlapthe measurement frequency range. Ifdouble sideband (DSB) is selected, thefrequency should be low (typically 30 MHz)so that perturbations in the noise passbandof the DUT and the tuners have little or noeffect on the measurement accuracy.

Page 40: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-14 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-17. Noise Options Dialog

If the setup includes a captive frequencyconverter, such as the Agilent (HP) 8971CNoise Figure Test Set, select <Auto>. Iffrequency conversion is not necessary (themeasurement frequency is within the rangeof the noise figure meter), select <Direct>.

LO Power

Enter a value, in dBm, for the local oscillator(LO) power required by the frequencyconverter for best operation. This entry isinactive if <Direct> is selected for theSideband entry below.

NFM Averaging:

Enter a value that is a power of two (2, 4,8, 16, etc.). More averaging improves datasmoothness but slows the measurementprocess. Eight is generally a good compro-mise for most applications.

Sideband:

If individual components (mixer and LO)are used to implement the frequencyconversion, select <DSB> (double side-band), <LSB> (lower sideband), or <USB>(upper sideband) in accordance with thefollowing criteria:

Select <DSB> if the measurementfrequency range is higher than about1700 MHz and the DUT noise pass-band is relatively flat, or if a filter isnot inserted ahead of the mixer todiscriminate against the image side-band.

Select <LSB> if a low pass filter isinserted ahead of the mixer todiscriminate against the image (USB)sideband.

Page 41: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-15

Select <USB> if a high pass filter isinserted ahead of the mixer todiscriminate against the image (LSB)sideband.

Consult the operating manual for the noisefigure meter for a more detailed explanation ofthe preceding sideband options.

If frequency conversion is implemented bymeans of a noise figure test set and LOcontrolled by the noise figure meter on itscaptive system interface bus (SIB), select<Auto>.

If the DUT and the load tuner are connecteddirectly to the input of the noise figure meter,select <Direct>.

4.6.3.2 Calibration

Number of Cal Points:

The entry determines the number of sourcepoints used during a noise calibration.

Min Attenuation Index:

Most noise figure meters (NFM) have a stepattenuator at the input to prevent overloadof the internal circuitry. This entry selectsthe minimum value set used during thecalibration and measurement. If the setupdoes not include an external preamplifier,set the index to “1” (minimum RFattenuation). If an external preamplifier isused, the index must be set to “2” or “3”depending upon the gain of thepreamplifier. If the index is set too low, thenoise figure meter will return an errormessage such as “Detector Overload”during the calibration.

Select <Auto> and the system will establisha setting. Refer to the NFM manual formore information.

NFM Attenuation Range:

The noise calibration may be done for upto 3 values of the RF attenuator in the NFM.Each value used will require calibrationover the entire measurement frequencyrange. Setting this entry to “1” causes thesystem to dispense with the calibration ofthe remaining two values and willsignificantly reduce the time required forcalibration. Large variations in DUT gain,however, require additional ranges to beavailable.

Noise Load Cal Method:

Two methods are available to determinethe input reflection coefficient of the noisemeasurement receiver. Select <Noise Cal>,and the input reflection coefficient iscalculated during the noise calibration.Select <VNA> and the system uses pre-measured 1-port S-parameter data savedin a Touchstone compatible file. The defaultfile is set up in the SNPW Default Fileproperty sheet (see section 4.5).

4.6.3.3 Measurement

Meas Point Selection:

Select <Automatic> and the system usesthe built-in point selection algorithm. Thenumber of points used may be entered inthe adjoining box. <Manual> permits theuser to select specific points and is availablefor the expert user.

Avoid Unstable Points:

The software automatically determinespossible unstable source and load tunerpositions from the DUT S-parameters.<Both> is generally the preferred setting.The other selections are <Load>, <Source>,or <No>.

Page 42: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-16 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Math Option:

There are four methods available forcalculating the noise parameter solution.

<MATH1> is the original Maury method,which rigorously accounts for the Hot/Cold reflection coefficient differences inthe noise source. It has greatly reducedsensitivity to the DUT s-parameterscompared to any published algorithm.

<MATH2> makes a very minor approx-imation relative to the Hot/Cold reflectioncoefficient differences of the noise source,but is often less sensitive to other errorsthan Math1.

<COLD ONLY> uses only cold noise powerdata during the noise measurement. (Thenoise source is still used in the hot stateduring noise calibration.) This math optionis rigorous, and is included for complete-ness since it is advocated in the publishedliterature. However, it is generally lessrobust and more sensitive to error thanMath1 or Math2, so it is generally notrecommended.

The best choice depends on the meas-urement setup and the device parametersunder test. They generally have goodagreement, but which produces smootherdata may vary with the situation.

<Contour> uses a rectangular contouringalgorithm similar to that used in the powerapplication to determine the noiseparameters.

<Resolution> should normally be a numberbetween 50 and 100. A higher numberproduces smoother and more accurateplots, but takes longer. A small number isquick, but less accurate, and straight linesegments may be visible in the contours.

The contours are calculated over arectangular area, based on the pointsselected. Sometimes a high resolution willproduce anomalous contours in areas notsurrounded by measured points. This canbe corrected by reducing the calculationresolution.

Plot Unsmoothed Points:

Select <Yes> and the unsmoothed datapoints will be plotted with a smoothedcurve.

If NO is selected, the smoothed datapoints will be plotted on top of a smooth-ed curve.

Save Noise Raw Data:

Select <Yes> and the raw data will besaved on comment lines at the end of thefile, so the Touchstone format is still valid.In this case, these comment lines areformatted specifically so the SNPWsoftware can retrieve the raw data.

4.6.3.4 Oscillation Check

At certain source and/or load terminationconditions the DUT may oscillate at one ormore frequencies which may be within orwell outside the measurement frequencyrange. Such oscillations may be detected bymonitoring the bias levels for changes fromthe quiescent settings or by scanning the out-put with a spectrum analyzer. These optionsselect the mode, method, and parameters ofthe automatic check for oscillations.

Check for Oscillations:

Select <Off> to disable the feature.

Select <Warn> and the program will stoprunning with a warning if an oscillation isdetected. When the operator responds, theprogram will resume and the data at theunstable position will be ignored.

Page 43: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-17

Select <Auto> and the measurement willcontinue without interruption even if anoscillation has been detected; however, thedata at the unstable position(s) will be ignored.

Oscillation Check Method:

Select <Bias> to monitor bias levels as themeans to detect oscillations (see OscillationCheck Bias Tolerances below).

Select <Spectrum Analyzer> to scan theDUT output for spurious oscillations.

Enter a value in the <Osc Level> box indBm as seen on the spectrum analyzer thatwould indicate a spurious oscillation.

Select “User” if a user function will beused to detect oscillations.

Spurious Sweep (GHz):

Enter the <Start> and <Stop> frequenciesfor the spectrum analyzer scan range.

Oscillation Check Bias Tolerances:

Enter the tolerances on the normal biasreadings for the purpose of detectingoscillations. Tolerance values should beentered for each bias value read in the biasdriver.

4.6.4 Power Options

To set up the system conditions for powercharacterization applications, click on the<Power> tab in the <Setup> <Options> dialogbox. This will bring up the power optionsdialog box (see figure 4-18).

Cal RF Source Match:

Select <No>, and the tuner will moveduring power or imod calibration to do a"load pull" on the RF source. This willdetermine the output reflection coefficientof the RF source.

Select <Yes>, and the output reflectioncoefficient of the RF source will bedetermined by a load pull measurementimplemented by moving a tuner duringthe power and imod calibration.

Select <Use S1P file>, and the tuner probeswill remain retracted throughout the poweror imod calibration, and the RF source willbe assumed to have a perfect output match.Also, a short and an open will be requiredto calibrate the input reflection coupler.

If "use.S1P FILE" is selected, the reflectioncoefficient of the RF Source will be readfrom a 1-port s-parameter file, specified inthe power tab of the default files propertysheet. The file can be created by using aVNA to measure the RF source reflectioncoefficient at the power cal plane.

Prompt for PM Zero:

Select <No>, and the zeroing will be doneautomatically without stopping for aprompt.

Select <Yes>, and a prompt to prepare thesystem for zeroing will be displayed beforethe power meters are zeroed. This providesany opportunity to turn off high powersources or amplifiers that don't completelyturn off by GPIB control. When the systemis ready to zero, click on <OK>.

If Yes was selected, a second prompt toprepare the system for operation will bedisplayed. At this point , turn on anyequipment that was turned off for zeroing,then click on <OK>.

☞ NOTE: Normally, the power meters arezeroed as part of every power, Imod, orACP calibration. This prompt also pro-vides an option to click on <Skip> to skipthe zeroing, if desired.

Page 44: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-18 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-18. Power Options Dialog

Use Dut-S in Power Measurement:

Select <No>, and the DUT s-parameterswill not be used during the powermeasurements, nor will the stability circles,if applicable, appear on the Smith chartdisplays depicting the source and loadtuner positions.

Select <Yes>, and the software will useDUT s-parameters in the power meas-urement. The main use is to send them tothe user function in case they are needed.They are not used by the main programexcept to display the stability circles.

Snap to Cal'd Power:

Select <No>, then the RF power settingsmay be interpolated between the calibratedpower values. If an input power meter isused, then power sett ings may beextrapolated as well as interpolated. SeeSection 7.3.5 for more details.

If YES is selected, the power settings on theRF power sources will be restricted tocalibrated settings.

Interpolated Tuning:

Select <No>, and the tuners will be movedonly to pre-characterized positions.

Page 45: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-19

Select <Yes>, and the tuners may bemoved to intermediate, uncharacterizedpositions. The relevant impedances arethen interpolated.

Move Default Z from Pull Data:

Select <No>, and the tuners will remain atthe pre-selected default position afterdisplay of a load or source pull.

Select <Measured>, and the tuners willmove to the measured optimum positionafter a display of load or source pull.

Select <Calculated>, and the tuners willmove to the optimum position calculatedfrom the countouring data.

PM Display Units:

Select either <dBm> or <Watts> as theunits for display and output of the powermeters.

PM Display Offset:

Select <No>, and the power meters willdisplay the actual power measured.

Select <Yes>, and the powers meterdisplays will be offset to indicate thepower at the DUT reference planes.

Pin Tolerance (dBm):

If "Snap to Cal'd Power" is set to NO and aninput power meter is used, then the RFpower level will be adjusted to provide thespecified available power at the DUT planewithin this tolerance. If this tolerancecannot be achieved, an error message willbe displayed.

Pout Tolerance (dBm):

If a constant Pout source or load pull isselected, the source power will be adjustedto get the specified output power withinthis tolerance. If this tolerance cannot beachieved, an error message will bedisplayed.

Duty Cycle (%):

This specifies the duty cycle in percent. Itmust be greater than zero, and less than orequal to 100%. This value is not used inthe main program, but is sent to the powermeter drivers in case a calculation of peakpower is needed.

Pulse Repetition Rate (KHz):

This value is not used by the main program,but is sent to the power meter drivers incase it is needed.

4.6.4.1 Spurious Sweep

Signal Bandwidth (MHz):

Enter a value for the signal bandwidth.This entry is used when the applied signalis modulated to insure that the spurioussweep will not include valid signalcomponents and prevent these from beingmeasured.

Sweep Range (GHz):

Enter a <Start> and <Stop> frequency forthe spurious sweep range.

Click on <Exclude Harmonics> to excludethese from the spurious sweep.

4.6.4.2 Gain Reference

Type of Gain:

This is the gain measurement type for gaincompression or expansion calculation.

<Gt> selects transducer gain.

<Gp> selects power gain.

Reference Value Type:

This option specifies the gain referencedefinition.

<Linear> selects linear gain.

<Maximum> selects maximum gain.

Page 46: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-20 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

4.6.4.3 Linear Gain Definition

Number of Points:

Enter the number of data points to definelinear gain value.

Tolerance (dB):

Enter the tolerance applied to the lineargain definition.

4.6.5 Intermod Options

This dialog is used to set up the system forintermodulation distortion measurements. SeeFigure 4-19.

Tone Spacing (MHz):

Enter the frequency spacing between thesignals from the two RF sources. A close

spacing improves the assumption that thetuner impedances are the same at bothfrequencies. A wider spacing helps separateless stable sources.

Tone Equality:

Enter the tolerance value for equalizingthe output of the two RF sources duringcalibration. It should be large enough toaccommodate the power setting resolutionof RF source 2. (Note that if the two RFsources have different power settingresolutions, the best equality can beachieved if RF source 2 is the one with thebest resolution.)

Span Ratio (max = 1.0):

The frequency span that the spectrum

Figure 4-19. Intermod Options Dialog

Page 47: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-21

analyzer will use for peak searches will bethe tone spacing multiplied by this number.The maximum of 1.0 will make the spanequal to the tone spacing, putting the edgeof the span halfway between adjacentsignals. This should guarantee that thespan will never overlap more than onesignal.

A smaller span ratio will result in betterresolution and accuracy from the spectrumanalyzer, but may be slower. A larger spanratio may be needed if less stable sourcesare used.

Min SA Atten (dB):

Enter the minimum attenuation setting tobe allowed for the spectrum analyzer. Avalue greater than zero may be needed toprotect the spectrum analyzer mixer or toimprove the spectrum analyzer impedancematch. However, this could also be alimitation on dynamic range.

Carrier Averaging:

Enter the number of averages to use whenmeasuring the carrier amplitudes andfrequencies.

Intermod Averaging:

Enter the number of averages to use whenmeasuring the intermod signal amplitudes.

SA IP3 (dBm):

Enter the specified third order intercept ofthe spectrum analyzer should be enteredhere in dBm.

4.6.5.1 Optimum SA Power

This option selects the method by which thepower to the spectrum analyzer mixer is set.

Select <Auto>, and the spectrum analyzer(or the driver) will automatically set theattenuators consistent with other settings.This option usually provides the fastestmeasurement, because it minimizes thenumber of measurements and attenuatorsetting changes. However, it may notprovide the optimum dynamic range.

Select <Meas>, and the spectrum analyzernoise floor and the input signals aremeasured. The mixer power that providesthe best dynamic range is then calculatedbased on a balance between the noisefloor and the analyzer IP3. The attenuatorswill then be set accordingly. This mode isthe slowest, but usually gives the bestdynamic range automatically.

Select <Fixed>, and the attenuators are setto hold the mixer power to the fived valueentered in the adjoining box.

Note that with all three modes, control ofpower or the spectrum analyzer mixer islimited to the resolution of the spectrumanalyzer attenuators.

4.6.5.2 Imod Measurement Method

This option selects the method by which theintermod signal is measured.

<Peak Search> sets the span and does apeak search to find the intermod signal.This is best if the time bases of either of thetwo RF sources or the spectrum analyzerare not stable. However, if the signal isclose to the noise floor, a false noise peakcould be read instead of the true intermodsignal. Also, if averaging is used, thismethod will be slower.

<Zero Span> sets the exact frequency ofthe expected intermod signal. This preventsfalse noise peaks from being read, andhelps to do fast averaging. With averaging,

Page 48: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-22 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

it helps to pull a CW signal out of the noise,so provides the best dynamic range.However, it does require both RF powersources and the spectrum analyzer to havestable time bases relative to each other.The frequency is calculated from thefrequency measured by the spectrumanalyzer for both of the carrier frequencies.The limitation is that if the time bases arenot stable, the measurement may not be atthe signal peak, thus causing an error.

☞ NOTE: To reduce the effects of frequencystability errors, connect the time bases ofboth RF source and the spectrum analyzertogether.

4.6.6 ACP Options

This dialog is used to set up the system foradjacent channel power (ACP) measurements.See Figure 4-20.

4.6.6.1 Source

This option sets up the modulation parametersfor the RF source used during the ACPcalibration and measurement.

Modulation Setup:

Click on <Specify String> to select thestring sent to the RF source driver. The titleof the following box will change to“Modulation String”. Click on the selector

Figure 4-20. ACP Options Dialog

Page 49: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-23

button to the right to bring up a list ofsource modulation strings.

The format of the modulation stringdepends on the selected RF source driver.Click the <Test> button on the instrumentproperties dialog to run the driver stand-alone. A list ing of the supportedmodulation string formats will generallybe displayed in the driver window.

Click on <Calculate> to set the mod-ulation in accordance with an acceptedstandard. The title of the following boxwill change to “Modulation Standard”.Click on the selector button to the right tobring up a list of applicable modulationstandards.

Click on <Use I/Q File> to set themodulation in accordance with a pre-stored file. The title of the following boxwill change to “Modulation Filename”.Click on the <Browse> button to bring upa list of file names.

PN Sequence Length (2^n):

This entry sets the length of the pseudo-random noise sequence before it repeats.The actual length is 2 raised to this integerpower.

4.6.6.2 Analyzer

These options set up the analyzer conditionsto be used during the calibration andmeasurement of ACP.

Modulation String:

This string is sent to the ACP analyzerdriver to select the type of modulationused during the calibration and meas-urement. Click on the selector button tothe right to bring up a list of analyzermodulation strings.

The format of the modulation stringdepends on the selected ACP analyzer

driver. Click the <Test> button on theinstrument properties dialog to run thedriver stand-alone. A listing of thesupported modulation string formats willgenerally be displayed in the driverwindow.

ACP Measurement Setup:

Click on <Use Driver Defaults> to use thedefault settings established for theanalyzer driver. These settings aregenerally applicable and to most meas-urements but may not be optimum forsome specific measurements.

Advanced user may click on <Specify>and enter the appropriate values for aspecific measurement.

ACP Averaging:

Enter the amount of averaging to be usedfor ACP measurements.

ACP Max Input (dBm):

Enter the maximum power expected at theACP analyzer input.

4.6.7 User Options

This dialog is used to set up the user functiondriver and user specified control strings. SeeFigure 4-21.

Driver:

This specifies the user function driver. Usethe Browse Button to find the executablefile. Enter "none" to turn off the userfunction.

Control Text:

Up to 25 separate control strings may beentered here. These will be sent to all ofthe drivers, in case any of them needspecial setup information.

Page 50: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-24 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-21. User Options Dialog

A suggested way to use this is to make upa unique keyword for each piece of specialdata needed by any driver or user function.A driver can search through the strings tofind one with that keyword, and thendecode the data from that string. This willallow multiple strings to be used fordifferent types of setup information withoutconflict.

4.7 Editing Noise Source Files

A noise source file includes excess noise ratio(ENR) data and hot/cold (on and off) reflectioncoefficients versus frequency. The Noise SourceEditor is used to create or modify noise sourcefiles. The ENR data is supplied by the noise

source manufacturer and should be availableand ready for entry before starting the editor. Thereflection data can be read from existing one-port s-parameter files (one each for the hot andcold conditions) or measured. In the latter case,make certain the system is not in “Demo” mode(see section 4.6.1) and that a calibrated vectornetwork analyzer is recognized on the GPIB (seesection 5.2).

From the Block Diagram View menu select<Setup>, <Characterize Noise source> to bringup the noise source file listing. A sample file isincluded with the software to facilitate start-up.Select and open an existing file to start the editor(see figure 4-22).

Page 51: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-25

Figure 4-22. Noise Source Editor, ENR Dialog

Select the <ENR> tab to edit the ENR. Use the<UP/DOWN> arrow keys to move the cursorand enter new values. To insert a new frequency,click on the blank line at the bottom and enterthe frequency and ENR. When the cursor ismoved to a new position the inserted frequencyand associated ENR will automatically beplaced in the proper sequential order. To deletea frequency and the associated ENR, click on thecontrol column to the left to highlight the entirerow and press the <Delete> key. At the bottomof the ENR dialog enter a label.

☞ NOTE: The user must correct the ENR for theadapter loss (if used) at the noise source out-put connector. If the adapter loss is small (e.g.:<0.2 dB) and the ambient temperature is withinthe range of 290 to 300 kelvins (nominally, 17°to 27°C or 62° to 82°F), then the correctioncan be as simple as subtracting the adapterloss from the manufacturer’s calibrated ENR.

☞ NOTE: The ENR table does not need to matchthe measurement frequencies exactly. Linearinterpolation will be used for measurementfrequencies between the calibrated points.

Click on the <Reflection Coefficient> tab tobring up the editor for the noise source hot andcold reflection coefficients (see figure 4-23).Click <Read> to bring in previously measuredand stored data. Click on <Measure> andfollow the instructions for calibrating theVNA, measuring the reflection coefficients,and storing the data. It is recommended(although not required) that the measurementfrequencies be the same as those at which thetuners are characterized. It is not necessarythat they be the same as the ENR frequencies.

When the entries are completed, click on<OK> and enter a file name when prompted.It is not necessary to enter an extension to thefile name. The program will apply a *.nsextension to the file. Other extensions can beused; however, the program may havedifficulty finding these when needed.

Page 52: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-26 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-23. Noise Source Editor, Reflection Coefficient Dialog.

4.8 Editing Power Sensor Files

A power sensor file includes sensor efficiency,loss, and reflection coefficients versusfrequency. The Power Sensor Editor is used tocreate or modify power sensor files. Thesensor manufacturer usually provides a tableof efficiency data versus frequency (inpercent); however, some sensors have thistable stored on an internal ROM chip, and thepower meter automatically adjusts thereadings accordingly. In these cases, enter100% for the efficiency at all frequencies. Theloss table is provided to account forattenuation placed between the sensor and theoutput s-parameter block (or the load tunerreference plane, if the output s-parameterblock is not used). If no attenuation is inserted,enter 0 dB at all frequencies. These datashould be available and ready for entry prior tostarting the editor, The reflection data can beread from an existing one-port s-parameter fileor measured. In the latter case, make certain

the system is not in “Demo” mode (see section4.6.1) and that a calibrated vector networkanalyzer is recognized on the GPIB (seesection 5.2).

From the Block Diagram View menu select<Setup>, <Characterize Power sensors> tobring up the power sensor file listing. A samplefile is included with the software to facilitatestart-up. Select and open an existing file tostart the editor (see figure 4-24).

Select the <Efficiency, Loss> tab to edit thesedata. Use the <UP/DOWN> arrow keys tomove the cursor and enter new values. Toinsert a new frequency, click on the blank lineat the bottom and enter the frequency (GHz),efficiency (%) and loss (dB). When the cursoris moved to a new position the insertedfrequency and associated data will auto-matically be placed in the proper sequentialorder. To delete a frequency and theassociated data, click on the control column tothe left to highlight the entire row and press the

Page 53: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-27

Figure 4-24. Power Sensor, Efficiency, Loss Dialog.

<Delete> key. At the bottom of the dialog boxenter a label.

☞ NOTE: The Efficiency/Loss table does notneed to match the measurement frequenciesexactly. Linear interpolation will be used formeasurement frequencies between the cali-brated points.

Click on the <Reflection Coefficient> tab tobring up the editor for the power sensorreflection coefficients (see figure 4-25). Click<Read> to bring in previously measured andstored data. Click on <Measure> and followthe instructions for calibrating the VNA,measuring the reflection coefficients, andstoring the data. It is recommended (althoughnot required) that the measurementfrequencies be the same as those at which thetuners are characterized. It is not necessarythat they be the same as the efficiency/lossfrequencies.

When the entries are completed, click on<OK> and enter a file name when prompted.It is not necessary to enter an extension to the

file name. The program will apply a *.pmextension to the file. Other extensions can beused; however, the program may havedifficulty finding these when needed. The newfile name may also be set up as the default (seesection 4.5).

4.9 Fixture Deembedding

4.9.1 Deembedding Options

Each half of the fixture is treated as as-parameter block that can be specified eitheras a model for a Maury Transistor Test Fixture(TTF) or as a two-port s-parameter file. Seesection 4.9.3 for more information on the TTFmodels and section 4.9.4 for information oncreating fixture s-parameter files. Fixture de-embedding is specified in the property sheetbrought up from the Block Diagram Viewby clicking on <Setup>, <Default Files/Directories>, and <Deembedding> (seesection 4.5.2). These files may also bespecified by double-clicking on the <S>blocks immediately adjacent to the DUT inthe block diagram.

Page 54: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-28 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-25. Power Sensor Editor, Reflection Coefficient Dialog.

Multiplexers are used to separate thefundamental and harmonic signals in aharmonic tuning application. The multiplexers-parameters must also be deembedded.Separate s-parameter files are used for eachpath of each multiplexer used in the setup (seesection 4.9.5). Multiplexer s-parameter filesare specified in the property sheet brought upfrom the Block Diagram View by clicking on<Setup>, <Default Files/Directories>, and<Harmonic> (see section 4.5.3). These filesmay also be specified by double-clicking onthe multiplexer blocks in the block diagram.

4.9.2 Tuner Embedding

In most cases, the tuners will be characterizedindependently of the fixture and multiplexers(if used). It is possible to embed the tuners filesinstead of specifying the deembeddings-parameters separately; however, embeddingthe tuner files has the disadvantage of notallowing for a fixture change without comp-lete re-characterization of the tuners.

Embedding tuner data is most useful whenonly a limited phase range is desired for thetuner characterization. In this case, if thetuner data is not embedded, the phase will berotated away from the desired range when thefixture s-parameters are de-embedded.

Embedding the tuner data duringcharacterization is done by shifting thereference plane of the VNA port 1 to where theDUT plane will later be when the fixture isadded. Even though the fixture is notphysically connected, the correct reflectiondata (at the DUT plane) will be shown directlyon the VNA display. This allows the desiredphase to be selected based on the DUTreference plane.

4.9.3 TTF Models

If the Maury TTF (MT950 Model Series) isused as the device test fixture, the fixtures-parameter blocks may be specified as models.This fixture has interchange able inserts fordifferent package styles. The following modelsare available for various fixture inserts:

Page 55: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-29

TTF70: Use the original model for MauryMT950B2 with MT951A2 70 milinsert.

TTF100: Use the original model for MauryMT950B2 with MT951D2 100 milinsert.

TTFA: Use the new model for MauryMT950B2 with MT951A2 70 milinsert.

TTFB: Use the model for Maury MT950B2with MT951B insert.

TTFC: Use the model for Maury MT950B2with MT951C insert.

TTFD: Use the new model for MauryMT950B2 with MT951D2 100 milinsert.

TTFE: Use the model for Maury MT950B2with MT951E insert.

TTFJ: Use the model for Maury MT950B2with MT951J insert.

TTFM: Use the model for Maury MT950B2with MT951M insert

4.9.4 Creating Fixture Files

When creating fixture files, the user must beaware of the following: two files must be setup, one for the input half of the fixture and onefor the output half of the fixture. As shown inFigure 4-26, the reference plane conventionfor the fixture s-parameters is that port 1 is atthe tuner, and port 2 is at the DUT, on eitherthe input or output. Consequently, the samefile can be used for both input and output if thefixture is symmetrical (or assumed to be).Including exact frequencies is recommendedfor best accuracy, although the program willinterpolate if required. The accuracy withwhich the fixture s-parameters can bedetermined is very much fixture dependent.With some fixtures, network analyzer

calibrations can be done inside the fixture atthe DUT planes. With other fixtures, this isnot possible, so approximation techniquesmust be used.

The fixture menu, an adaptation of the MauryMT956D Fixture Characterization Software,has three basic approaches to f ixturecharacterization. The first two, 1-port and2-port calibration approaches, require anestimate of the electrical length of each fixturehalf. The estimate need be accurate only toone-quarter wavelength throughout thefrequency range. Alternatively, i f theminimum frequency step size is such that thephase shift between frequencies is less than180°, the software can calculate the lengthautomatically.

☞ NOTE: If large frequency step sizes aredesired, use a non-uniform frequency list whereat least one frequency step in the range is smallenough. Alternately, the delay can be deter-mined by first characterizing the fixture over anarrow range and using the automatic delaycalculation feature. The value can then berecorded and entered manually for a charac-terization with wide frequency step sizes.

a. The 1-port calibration approach requires1-port network analyzer calibrations at theinput plane and at the DUT plane for eachfixture half. The software will then readboth sets of 1-port calibration data fromthe VNA and subtract the two referenceplanes to get the 2-port s-parameters of theone fixture half. This approach assumesthat the fixture is passive and reciprocal,and since each fixture half must bemeasured separately, requires a total offour calibrations (two each for each half ofthe fixture) unless the fixture is assumed tobe symmetrical. See section 4.9.4.1 for adescription of this technique.

b. The 2-port calibration approach requires2-port network analyzer calibrations at thefixture input planes and at the DUT planes

Page 56: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-30 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

inside the fixture. The software will thenread both sets of 2-port calibration datafrom the VNA and subtract the tworeference planes to get the 2-ports-parameters of both fixture halves. Thisapproach assumes that the fixture ispassive and reciprocal, and requires onlytwo calibrations. This method is excellentfor fixtures where 2-port calibrations arethe most accurate, such as a TRLcalibration in microstrip. See section4.9.4.2 for a description of this technique.

c. The third approach is an approximationthat may be used when calibration insidethe fixture at the DUT planes is notpossible. The fixture is assumed to bepassive and reciprocal. The s-parametersare calculated from measurements of thedelay and loss of the fixture, which can beaccomplished by either a reflection ortransmission measurement. Both tech-niques assume the fixture is reflectionless.These methods are commonly used below2 GHz and are primarily useful for fixturesconsisting of a 50 ohm line from theconnector to the DUT input plane. Thereflection technique measures each halfindependently; however, it is moresensitive to mismatch errors than thetransmission method. The latter tech-nique, while somewhat less sensitive tomismatch, does assume that the fixture issymmetrical, but it is sometimes difficultto determine the length of the in-circuitthru used during the measurement. Seesections 4.9.4.3 and 4.9.4.4 for adescription of these techniques.

4.9.4.1 1-Port Fixture Calibration Procedure

a. Set up the VNA so that the fixture input canbe connected directly to the test port.

b. From the Block Diagram View Menu clickon <Fixture>, <Fixture 1-port> to bring upthe dialog box for step 1 of the procedure.

c. If the frequencies have been previouslyset up in the network analyzer, click on<Re-Read VNA frequencies>. Other-wise, follow the on-screen instructions toenter a new frequency list, then click<Write new VNA frequencies>. It isrecommended that the frequenciescoincide with the tuner characterizationfrequencies; however, the programwill interpolate if necessary. Note themaximum calculable airline length forthe selected frequency step size. If thefixture half is longer than this value, it willbe necessary to enter the length later in theprocedure.

d. Perform an off-line, 1-port calibration atthe VNA test port connector (without thefixture) using the analyzer front panelcontrols (the software will put the VNAin the local mode after reading thefrequencies).

e. Enter the calibration set number and click<Next>. The software will then read theerror correction terms from the networkanalyzer and bring up the dialog for step 2of the procedure.

f. Connect the input half of the fixture to theVNA test port used in the prior calibration,and perform an off-line, 1-port calibrationat the DUT plane inside the fixture usingthe analyzer front panel controls.

g. Enter the calibration set number for thislast calibration and click <Next>. Thesoftware will then read the error cor-rection terms from the network analyzerand bring up the fixture s-parameterdisplay.Figure 4-26. Reference Plane Convention

Page 57: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-31

h. If the fixture-half electrical length is lessthan the maximum calculable air linelength noted in the step 1 dialog, click on<Calculate length automatically>. Other-wise enter the estimated fixture length incentimeters.

☞ NOTE: If the S12 or S21 trace suddenlyjumps from one side of the polar chart tothe other, check the fixture length value.

If the system reference impedance foreither calibration is not 50 ohms, click on<Renormalize> and enter the correctvalues.

Enter a label where indicated in the dialogbox and click <Finish>.

i. Enter a file name for the fixture input half.Do not enter an extension. The softwarewill automatically append “.s2p” as theextension. If the fixture is symmetrical (orassumed to be), the same file can be usedfor both the input and output halves.Otherwise, the entire procedure must berepeated for the output half.

4.9.4.2 2-Port Fixture Calibration Procedure

a. Set up the VNA with a return cable and testport connectors so that the fixture can beinserted when needed.

b. From the Block Diagram View Menu clickon <Fixture>, <Fixture 2-port> to bring upthe dialog box for step 1 of the procedure.

c. If the frequencies have been previously setup in the network analyzer, click on <Re-Read VNA frequencies>. Otherwise,follow the on-screen instructions to enter anew frequency list, then click <Write newVNA frequencies>. It is recommended thatthe frequencies coincide with the tunercharacterization frequencies; however,the program will interpolate if necessary.Note the maximum calculable airlinelength for the selected frequency step size.If the fixture half is longer than this value,

it will be necessary to enter the length laterin the procedure.

d. Perform an off-line, 2-port calibration atthe VNA test port connectors (without thefixture) using the analyzer front panelcontrols (the software will put the VNAin the local mode after reading thefrequencies).

e. Enter the calibration set number and click<Next>. The software will then read theerror correction terms from the networkanalyzer and bring up the dialog for step 2of the procedure.

f. Connect the fixture between the VNA testports used in the prior calibration, andperform an off-line, 2-port calibration atthe DUT planes inside the fixture using theanalyzer front panel controls.

g. Enter the calibration set number for thislast calibration and click <Next>. Thesoftware will then read the error cor-rection terms from the network analyzerand bring up the fixture s-parameterdisplay.

h. If the fixture-half electrical length is lessthan the maximum calculable airlinelength noted in the step 1 dialog, click on<Calculate length automatically> for boththe input and output fixture halves.Otherwise enter the estimated fixturelengths in centimeters.

☞ NOTE: If the S12 or S21 trace suddenlyjumps from one side of the polar chart tothe other, check the fixture length value.

If the system reference impedance foreither calibration is not 50 ohms, click on<Renormalize> and enter the correctvalues.

Enter a label where indicated in the dialogbox and click <Finish>.

Page 58: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-32 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

i. Enter a file name for the fixture input half.Do not enter an extension. The softwarewill automatically append “.s2p” as theextension. When prompted, enter a filename for the fixture output half.

4.9.4.3 Calculating Fixture S-Parameters:Reflection Method

a. Set up the VNA with a return cable an sothat the fixture input can be connecteddirectly to the test ports and calibrate theVNA at a single frequency for a 1-portmeasurement.

b. Connect the input half of the fixture to theVNA port, and insert a short at the DUTplane. Measure the reflection delay(picoseconds) and reflection loss (dB).Since this is the 2-way delay and loss,divide both values by 2 to get the 1-waydelay and loss.

c. From the Block Diagram View menu, clickon <Fixture>, <Fixture Calculate> to bringup the Fixture S-Parameter Estimationdialog box.

d. Enter the frequency range over which thefixture s-parameters are to be calculated,the delay and loss recorded in (b) above,the frequency at which these weremeasured, and a label, then click <OK>.

e. Enter a file name for the fixture input half.Do not enter an extension. The softwarewill automatically append “.s2p” as theextension. The s-parameter display willnow be visible. Use the <LEFT/RIGHTARROW> keys to move the frequencymarker and read the s-parameters at eachfrequency.

f. If the fixture is symmetrical (or assumed tobe), the same file may be used for bothinput and output halves. Otherwise,repeat the procedure starting with (b)above.

4.9.4.4 Calculating Fixture S-Parameters:Transmission Method

a. Set up the VNA with a return cable so thatthe fixture input can be connected directlyto the test ports and calibrate the VNAat a single frequency for a 2-portmeasurement.

b. Connect the fixture between the test ports,insert a thru in the fixture, and measure thedelay (picoseconds) and loss (dB). If thethru is not “zero length”, subtract its delayand loss from the measured results, dividethe remainders by two, and record theresults.

c. From the Block Diagram View menu, clickon <Fixture>, <Fixture Calculate> to bringup the Fixture S-Parameter Estimationdialog box.

d. Enter the frequency range over which thefixture s-parameters are to be calculated,the delay and loss recorded in (b) above,the frequency at which these weremeasured, and a label, then click <OK>.

e. Enter a file name for the fixture half. Do notenter an extension. The software willautomatically append “.s2p” as theextension. The s-parameter display willnow be visible. Use the <LEFT/RIGHTARROW> keys to move the frequencymarker and read the s-parameters at eachfrequency.

f. Since this procedure assumes the fixture tobe symmetrical, use the same file for boththe input and output halves of the fixture.

4.9.5 Creating Multiplexer Files

When creating multiplexer files, the user mustbe aware of the following: several files mustbe set up, one for the fundamental section ofthe multiplexer, one for the 2nd harmonicsection of the multiplexer and another for the3rd harmonic section of the multiplexer.Including exact frequencies is recommended

Page 59: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-33

for best accuracy, although the program willinterpolate if required. The most direct wayto create multiplexer files is to calibrate thenetwork analyzer at the proper referenceplane on both sides of the multiplexer andthen measure the s-parameters using thes-parameter measurement function.

The orientation of the multiplexer s-parameterdata (ports 1 and 2) is the same as for thefixture, shown in Figure 4-26. The multiplexerwill be inserted between the fixture and thetuner on either the load or source side. Thiscan also be seen in the block diagram if theoption to show the port numbers is selected.

Refer to Section 6.3 for 2-port s-parametermeasurements, also refer to the networkanalyzer manual for calibration instructions.

4.10 Manipulating S-Parameters

The fixture menu, an adaptation of the MauryMT956D Fixture Software, contains severalfunctions that are useful to manipulates-parameter files. These can be used to makereference planes match the block diagram.

4.10.1 Cascade S-Parameters

This is used to cascade two 2-port s-parameterfiles, and create a resulting combined file.Select <Fixture><Cascade S-Parameters> tobring up the dialog shown in Figure 4-27.

Click the <Reverse> buttons as required to setup the desired port conventions for eachs-parameter block. Click on each <Change>

Figure 4-27. Cascade S-Parameters Dialog

Page 60: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-34 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

button to setup the filenames for the input filesand the resulting files. Enter a label for theresulting s-parameter file.

When the filenames, port conventions, andlabel are correct, click OK to create and savethe cascaded s-parameter file.

4.10.2 Un-cascade S-Parameters

This is used to un-cascade a known 2-ports-parameter block away from a knowncombined s-parameter block, and create aresidual result file. Select <Fixture><Un-cascade S-parameters> to bring up the dialogshown in Figure 4-28.

Click the <Reverse> buttons as required to setup the desired port conventions for each

s-parameter block. Click on each <Change>button to set up the filenames for the input filesand the resulting files. Enter a label for theresulting s-parameter file.

When the filenames, port conventions, andlabel are correct, click OK to create and savethe un-cascaded s-parameter file.

4.10.3 Reverse S-Parameters

This is used to reverse the port conventions ofan s-parameter file. From the fixture menu,select <Reverse S-Parameters>. Browse for afilename, and that file will be read, reversed,and displayed as shown in Figure 4-29. If theresult looks correct, click <OK> and enter anew filename to save the reversed s-parameterdata.

Figure 4-28. Un-Cascade S-Parameters Dialog

Page 61: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 4-35

4.10.4 Re-Normalize S-Parameters

This is used to re-normalize s-parameter datato difference reference impedances. It willoperate on 2-port s-parameter data that isalready in memory.

In general, s-parameters are relativequantities, and the s-parameter definitionallows every port to be normalized separately.From the Fixture Menu, select <Re-normalizeS-parameter memory> to bring up the dialogshown in Figure 4-30. Adjust the current anddesired reference impedance entries, andclick OK.

To view and save the result, use the ViewS-parameter menu to access the s-parameterdata in memory.

4.11 Displaying Software Version

Select <Help> from the SNPW menu, thenselect <About SNPW> to display the softwareversion and release date, serial number, andinstalled options. The copyright notice is alsodisplayed here.

Figure 4-29. Display of Reversed S-Parameters

Page 62: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

4-36 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 4-30. Renormalize S-Parameters Dialog

Page 63: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-1

5.1 Calibrating the Tuners

Before any operation using tuners can bedone, the tuners must be calibrated. Thisconsists of entering tuner data into memory forboth tuners. This is initially done bycharacterizing the tuners by direct measurementwith the network analyzer. Subsequently, thisis normally done by reading previously savedtuner files.

The tuner data consists of measured 2-ports-parameter data and corresponding tunerpositions for a number of discrete tunerpositions at every frequency. Althoughreferred to always as "tuner data", thes-parameters may include bias tees, adapters,and other passive components cascadedwith the tuners.

When connecting the tuners to the networkanalyzer for characterization, the end of thetuner which will be closest to the DUT shouldbe connected to port 1 of the networkanalyzer. This convention, shown in Figure5-1, provides a symmetry which allows a tunerto be used in either the source or load positionafter characterization. Bias tees, filters, andother lossy components should be on theopposite side of the tuner.

There are two general methods of characterizingthe tuners: step reflection and step position. Thestep reflection method is based on a specifiedreflection coefficient range (magnitude andphase), and the step position is based on aposition range (carriage and probe). The stepreflection method is normally preferred, as itprovides much more uniform coverage of theSmith chart.

5.1.1 Automatic Step Reflection TunerCharacterization

This tuner characterization method selectspositions with a constant separation on theSmith Chart. This method first measures thetuner to model the tuner, then selects positionsto fully characterize the tuner based upon themodel.

From the Block Diagram view, select: <Setup>,<Characterize Tuners>, <Step Reflection>.Select the tuner to be calibrated. Note that withthe established port conventions, a tuner may beused in any position (source, load, etc.),regardless of the selection here, simply byrecalling its file – provided the frequency rangeis correct for that position. A prompt to re-initialize the tuner will appear. Select <Yes> ifthe tuner has not been previously initializedwithin the past few hours (recommended with anew characterization).

a. A prompt to calibrate the network analyzerfor a 2-port measurement will be displayed.

The network analyzer frequencies will beread and displayed, and you can acceptthem, or enter new values. If you enter newfrequencies, click the <Write New VNAFrequencies> button before starting thecalibration.

Calibrate the network analyzer by turningon a previous calibration, or by doing anew one. The network analyzer should becalibrated from it’s front panel using

5Calibrating the System

Figure 5-1. Tuner Orientation Convention During Characterization

TUNER1 2

CalibratedNetworkAnalyzer

Port 1

CalibratedNetworkAnalyzer

Port 2

This end of the tuner willconnect to the DUT

BIASTEE

Page 64: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 5-2. Tuner Step Reflection Range Setup Editor

b. The next wizard page provides for embed-ding the VNA calibration.

☞ NOTE: See Section 5.1.3 for more discussionof Embedding Tuner Data.

If embedding is needed, first make sure thefixture and multiplexer files are correct. If not,click the change buttons to select new files (or

whatever calibration method availablewhich will give the best accuracy.

When the 2-port VNA calibration is ready,click Next.

☞ NOTE: Be sure to leave the network ana-lyzer frequencies alone after they are readby the SNPW program.

Page 65: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-3

fixture model). Next, specify the VNA Cal. setnumbers to read and write before clicking the<Embed VNA Calibration> button.

This will read the current error terms from thespecified cal set, shift the reference plane ofthe VNA port 1 thru the s-parameters of thefixture/multiplexer, and then write the newerror terms back to the specified cal set towrite. The reference plane of the VNA port 2will not change.

If the VNA calibration was previouslyembedded, just click the check box toindicate that, but do not embed thecalibration a second time.

☞ NOTE: If embedding is done, the model orfilenames will be written into the tuner file.

When the embedding is done, or if embed-ding is not needed, click Next.

c. The next wizard page prompts to select thecharacterization frequencies as a subset ofthe VNA frequency range. The initialdefault will be the same as the VNAfrequencies.

Also, click the "Harmonics Selected" buttonto toggle through the choices to select thenumber of harmonic frequencies tomeasure.

If the VNA calibration has insufficientfrequency range to measure all specifiedharmonics over the full fundamentalfrequency range, a warning will bedisplayed on the screen. In this case, theharmonics that are available will bemeasured. Therefore, the tuner data or filecould have harmonic frequencies at thelow fundamental frequencies, and fewer(or zero) harmonic frequencies at the higherfundamental frequencies.

Click <Next> to proceed.

d. The next step is to edit the range of reflectioncoefficients, if desired. The default range(see Figure 5-2) will provide nominalreflection coefficient coverage of the entireSmith chart.

To change the coverage of the Smith chart,edit the magnitude and phase start/stopvalues in the Reflection Range box.

The Point Separation Magnitude specifiesthe density of the measured points (howclose they are together). The approximatenumber of points that will result is shownat the bottom of the dialog. ( I t 'sapproximate because the specifiedmagnitude range could go beyond thephysical capability of the tuner.) Edit thevalue of the Point Separation Magnitude,then click on another edit box to updatethe approximate number of points.

e. On the last page of the wizard, enter thelabel and filename for the data, then select<Finish> to start the characterization.

f. When the characterization is complete,the program will store the file under theselected file name and bring up a S11Smith chart display of all characterizedtuner points at the start frequency. SeeSection 5.1.7 for more information on thetuner display.

5.1.2 Automatic Step Position TunerCharacterization

This automatic tuner characterization willstep the tuner motors over a range of positionsto create a grid of impedance points. Thedefault ranges will spread the points over theentire Smith chart. The ranges can be modifiedat each frequency to cover desired Smith chartareas.

Page 66: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

From the Block Diagram view, select: <Setup>,<Characterize Tuners>, <Step Position>. Selectthe tuner to be calibrated. Note that with theestablished port conventions, a tuner may beused in any position (source, load, etc.),regardless of the selection here, simply berecalling its file – provided the frequency rangeis correct for that position. A prompt to re-initialize the tuner will appear. Select <Yes> ifthe tuner has not been previously initializedwithin the past few hours (recommended witha new characterization).

To do Step Position automatic tuner character-ization, select <Characterize Tuners> from the<Setup> Menu, then <Step Position> andchoose either <Source Tuner>, <Source2Tuner>, <Source3 Tuner> or <Load Tuner>,<Load2 Tuner>, or <Load3 Tuner>. This startsthe tuner characterization wizard with thefollowing sequence:

a. A prompt to calibrate the network analyzerfor a 2-port measurement will be displayed.

Figure 5-3. Tuner Step Position Range Setup Editor

Page 67: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-5

The network analyzer frequencies will beread and displayed, and you can acceptthem, or enter new values. If you enter newfrequencies, click the <Write new VNAFrequencies> button before starting thecalibration.

Calibrate the network analyzer by turningon a previous calibration, or by doing anew one. The network analyzer should becalibrated from it’s front panel usingwhatever calibration method availablewhich will give the best accuracy.

When the 2-port VNA calibration is ready,click <Next>.

☞ NOTE: Be sure to leave the networkanalyzer frequencies alone after theyare read by the SNPW program.

b. The next wizard page provides forembedding the VNA calibration.

☞ NOTE: See Section 5.1.3 for more discussionof Embedding Tuner Data.

If embedding is needed, first make surethe fixture and multiplexer files arecorrect. If not, click the change buttonsto select new files (or fixture model).Next, specify the VNA cal set numbersto read and write before clicking the<Embed VNA Calibration> button.

This will read the current error terms fromthe specified cal set, shift the referenceplane of the VNA port 1 thru the s-parameters of the fixture/multiplexer, andthen write the new error terms back to thespecified cal set to write. The referenceplane of the VNA port 2 will not change.

If the VNA calibration was previouslyembedded, just click the check box toindicate that, but do not embed thecalibration a second time.

☞ NOTE: If embedding is done, the model orfilenames will be written into the tunerfile.

When the embedding is done, or if embed-ding is not needed, click <Next>.

c. The next wizard page prompts to select thecharacterization frequencies as a subset ofthe VNA frequency range. The initialdefault will be the same as the VNAfrequencies.

Also, click the "Harmonics Selected" buttonto toggle through the choices to select thenumber of harmonic frequencies tomeasure.

If the VNA calibration has insufficientfrequency range to measure all specifiedharmonics over the full fundamentalfrequency range, a warning will bedisplayed on the screen. In this case, theharmonics that are available will bemeasured. Therefore, the tuner data or filecould have harmonic frequencies at thelow fundamental frequencies, and fewer(or zero) harmonic frequencies at the higherfundamental frequencies.

Click <Next> to proceed.

d. The next step is to edit the range ofpositions, if desired. The default range (seeFigure 5-3) will provide nominal reflectioncoefficient coverage of the entire Smithchart. The density depends on the defaultnumber of carriage and probe positions,shown in the lower right corner of thePosition Range Setup Page.

The position range is set independently ateach frequency, to optimize coverage. Theprobe which is out of band will stayretracted.

Page 68: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

To change the coverage of the Smith chart,edit the carriage position range to modifyphase, and edit the active probe positionrange to modify magnitude.

The easiest way to get uniform phasecoverage is to set the default number ofpositions, then auto-select. This can bedone one frequency at a time, or for allfrequencies at once.

☞ NOTE: The active probe is determined bythe frequency if there are two probes. Probe1 is the low frequency probe and probe 2 isthe high frequency probe. The crossoverfrequency can be seen by the probe selec-tion in the automatic range selection. It isalso listed in the appropriate tuner manual.

If complete coverage of the Smith chart is notneeded, the easiest way to determine whatposition range is needed is to put the systemin local, and move the tuners manually todetermine the start and stop points for thecarriage and the active probe. This worksbest if you start the characterization, andchoose tuner embedding to get the networkanalyzer reference plane shifted to the deviceplane. Then back out and go to local. Thenthe limits can be determined and thecharacterization started again. This time,select embedding so the tuner file will beproperly labeled, but do not modify thenetwork analyzer cal set a second time.

e. On the last page of wizard, enter the labeland filename for the data, then select<Finish> to start the characterization.

f. When the characterization is complete,the program will store the file under theselected file name and bring up a S11Smith chart display of all characterized

tuner points at the start frequency. SeeSection 5.1.7 for more information on thetuner display.

5.1.3 Embedding Tuner Data DuringCharacterization

If desired, the reference plane of the networkanalyzer calibration can be shifted away fromthe tuner port to what will be the devicereference plane when the fixture is connectedto the tuner. The purpose is to have thenetwork analyzer display the tuner reflectioncoefficient that the device will see. This isnormally very important when partialcoverage of the Smith chart is desired during astep reflection characterization, and is usefulfor choosing a tuner position range in localmode prior to a step position characterization.It does reduce the flexibility of the tuner data,since it can later be used only with the onefixture.

Once a tuner position range is determined,embedding is normally not selected for a stepposition characterization. This is because anunembeded tuner file can later be used withany fixture, so it is more flexible. Also, sincethe tuner is moved automatically and themeasurement will run unattended, there islittle need to view the data at the device planeduring the characterization.

If embedding is selected, the network analyzercalibration will be read into the computer,modified, then written back to the networkanalyzer. If the network analyzer can storeonly one calibration, the original calibrationwill be lost. However, if the network analyzercan store multiple cal sets, you will beprompted for a cal set number to read and

Page 69: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-7

Figure 5-4. Typical Setup for Performing Noise Measurements

write. The cal set to read should be the currentcalibration. The cal set to write will be wherethe modified calibration terms will be writtenand will become the current calibration.

☞ NOTE: If the modified cal set cannot be savedinto a different cal set, the original calibrationwill be lost. It may be useful to save theoriginal calibration on disk before embeddingif the network analyzer has that provision.

5.1.4 Saving Tuner Files

Since tuner characterization is time consum-ing, it is important to save the tuner data infiles. This can be done during the tunercharacterization, and can also be done byselecting <Save As> from the <File> menu ofthe tuner display view.

It is sometimes useful to save additional copiesof a tuner file. For example, if a special set ofpoints has been selected in the noise or powermeasurement, that selection will be saved.

5.1.5 Recalling Tuner Files

From the Block Diagram view, select:<Setup>, <Characterize Tuners>, <Get TunerFile>. Then select the position of the tuner(load, source, etc.). The default file name willbe pre-typed on the entry line to minimizeeffort when the same files are always used.

5.1.6 Combining Tuner Files

Tuner files may be combined to consolidatefrequency ranges or density of reflectioncoverage at frequencies that two tuner fileshave in common.

Tuner file combining reads in two tuner files;compares these files for common modelnumbers and embedding, then produces anew tuner file. To combine tuner files, select<Characterize Tuners> from the <Setup>Menu, then <Combine Tuner Files>. Thisproduces the following sequence:

a. A prompt for the first tuner data file. Enterthe desired file name or press <Browse> toselect a tuner data file. This file will beopened and read.

b. The next prompt will be for the secondtuner data file. Enter the desired file nameor press <Browse> to select a tuner datafile. This file will be opened and read.

☞ NOTE: These data files will be compared forcommon tuner model numbers and embed-ding. If one of these comparisons fails, theprogram will return a warning message andstop the combining process.

c. The final prompt will be for the combineddata file name.

Page 70: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

5.1.7 Displaying the Tuner Data

The tuner data is displayed immediately aftera characterization. It can also be displayedfrom the block diagram view by reading atuner file: Select <View >, <Tuners> and selectthe tuner to be displayed. The initial displaywill be a S11 Smith chart showing all thecharacterized tuner points at the startfrequency.

Press a <Right/Left Arrow> key to toggle throughthe entire frequency range. Alternatively, press<Ctrl-F> or select <View>, <Change Frequency>,and use the <Up/Down Arrow> keys to select aspecific frequency for display.

When the mouse cursor is moved within thechart, its position is continuously displayedjust below the chart. Clicking the left mousebutton on a characterized point brings up areadout of all four s-parameters at that point. Areadout of the s-parameters between character-ized points can be obtained by selecting<View> from the menu bar, checking<Interpolate>, and left clicking on the area ofinterest in the chart.

To bring up a display of any of the other threes-parameters, select <View>, <Format> andtoggle through the selections in the pop-upwindow.

Figure 5-5. Noise Calibration Display

Page 71: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-9

Figure 5-6. Typical Setup for Performing Power Measurements

Areas of the displayed chart can be viewed inmore detail by a right-click within the chartand selecting <Zoom window> from the pop-up menu. Hold the left mouse button and dragthe rectangular window over the area ofinterest. When the button is released, the areawithin the rectangle will be magnified. Rightclick again and select <Zoom all> to return tothe original chart.

The tuner may be moved to a specific point bya right-click to bring the pop-up menu andselecting <Move Tuner>. Move the boxedcross-hair cursor to the position of interest andleft-click the mouse.

The tuner data does not normally include anyde-embedding s-parameters that are specifiedin the block diagram. To see the de-embed-emdeded tuner data, select <View>, <CascadeS-Parameters> from the menu bar. Clickingthat menu item again will toggle the cascademode off.

Press <Esc> or click on the close window boxon the menu bar to exit the tuner display.

5.1.8 Initializing Tuners

Before the tuners can be used, they must bephysically initialized. This consists of findingthe lower optical limit sensors to provide arepeatable starting point for the stepper motoroperation. Normally, this is done auto-matically the first time that the tuners areneeded in any calibration procedure.

To initialize (or re-initialize) the tunersseparately from any other function, select<Calibrate><Initialize Tuners>.

☞ NOTE: Re-initialize is needed when thecontroller is turned off, or a limit is encoun-tered (this may happen during local control, orduring system troubleshooting).

5.2 S-Parameter Calibration

5.2.1 Calibrating the Network Analyzer

S-parameter calibration is done in local modeon the vector network analyzer (VNA), so anyavailable calibration technique can be used.However, only a linear frequency range is

Page 72: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-10 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

allowed, so the program will set up afrequency list on the network analyzer prior toprompting the user to do the calibration.

Even though the actual network calibration isdone off-line, the program will not allow anys-parameter measurements until this step hasbeen done.

The sequence is as follows:

a. Select <Calibrate>, then either <1 PortS-Parameters> or <2 Port S-Parameters>as required. If a 2-port calibration isdone, either 1-port or 2-port measurementsmay be done. A 1-port calibration can beused for noise source or power sensormeasurement, or general 1-port s-parameter measurements.

b. The software will read the networkanalyzer frequencies, and then put thenetwork analyzer into local mode so itcan be calibrated off-line. The VNACalibration Dialog will display thefrequencies, and prompt to do thecalibration.

To change the network analyzer frequenciesprior to the calibration, enter the new rangeand click the <Write new Frequencies> button.

If a 2-port calibration is being done, thedialog will also include a de-embeddingblock, this allows the reference plane ofthe network analyzer to be shifted throughthe specified s -pa ramete r . Th i s i simportant, for example, if you calibrateat the coaxial plane, but want to measureat the de-embedded DUT plane.

To de-embed the network analyzercalibration, make sure that the de-embedding specifiers are correct, enterthe cal set numbers to read and write, andclick the "De-embed VNA Calibration"button. This will read the current error

terms from the specified cal set, shift thereference planes of both VNA ports awayfrom the VNA through the specifieds-parameters, and then write the new errorterms back to the specified cal set to write.

c. When the calibration is complete, or ifthe network analyzer was previouslycalibrated, press <VNA Cal Ready> andverify that the calibration is still on andactive. Most network analyzers turn thecalibration off when the frequencies arewritten to them.

5.2.2 Accuracy Considerations for S-parameterCalibration

When calibrating the network analyzer, it is veryimportant to get the best accuracy possible. Innoise measurements, very complex, nonlinearmathematics are used to solve for the noiseparameter solution, and small errors anywherecan be amplified into larger errors in the finalresult. Power measurements are somewhat lesssensitive, but errors can still be carried throughto the end result.

☞ NOTE: TRL (or LRL) calibration are generallyrecommended when highly reflective devices(such as tuners or transistors) are to be mea-sured. TRL calibrations tend to produce bettersource match, which improves measurementsat the edge of the Smith chart.

It is highly recommended that the residualsource match be measured to verify theaccuracy prior to continuing. This can be donefairly simply by connecting a long offset shortto each port and looking at the measuredreturn loss vs. frequency. Ideally, the responseshould be smooth, and flat, and some loss (afew tenths of a dB) is normal. A large peak topeak (p-p) ripple (or gain) indicates poorcalibration.

Page 73: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-11

5.3 Noise Calibration

5.3.1 The noise measurement system should be setup per Figure 5-4. For the noise calibration, athru will be put in place of the DUT, and thecomplete noise and gain parameters of thereceiver will be measured vs. frequency.Tuner files must be already read into memory.During the noise calibration, a noise sourcefile and a thru 2-port s-parameter file will beneeded. The noise source file contains theENR and the reflection coefficients of the noisesource in the hot/cold states. The thru does notneed to be perfect, but must have knowns-parameters in a file.

5.3.2 The sequence of the noise calibration isas follows:

a. Select <Noise> from the <Calibrate> Menu.

b. Select <New Cal> from the NoiseCalibration Menu.

c. The available frequency range and thecurrent frequency range will be displayed.The available range consists of frequencieswhich the two tuner files have in common.The current frequencies will be the sameor a subset (if a subset was selectedpreviously).

Figure 5-7. Power Calibration

Page 74: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-12 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

The default thru filename will be pre-typedonto the entry line for convenience, sinceoften the same file is always used. Enter orbrowse to select a new filename.

The ambient temperature in degrees Celsiusmay also be changed here. This value isneeded to accurately model the noisecontribution of the passive components ofthe system (such as tuners, adapters, etc.).

d. When all entries are complete, click <OK>.The program will then read the noise sourcefile established on the Setup Files menuand will then do an on-line check to insurethat all required instruments in place andconnected to the GPIB. A prompt to re-initialize the tuners will appear. Click<Yes> if the tuners have not been recentlyinitialized.

e. The last prompt before starting thecalibration is to connect the thru. Makesure that it is in place, then click <OK>.The number of calibration impedancepoints will be the current values setup inthe noise options editor. As the calibrationprogresses, the data will scroll through thelower part of the screen, and will beprogressively plotted in the top part. Thenumber of lines tabulated per frequencydepends on the RF attenuator range to becalibrated.

If there is any problem with the calibrationdata, press the <End> key to abort thecalibration. The program will revert to theBlock Diagram view. Select <Setup> and<Go to local> to troubleshoot the system.

f. When the calibration is complete, a promptto enter a label will appear. If this was thefirst calibration of the session, the labelentry line will be blank. If an earliercalibration had been completed andlabeled, that label will appear on the entryline. Select <Don’t Change> to accept thelabel shown or, if the line is blank, to skipthis step and not apply a label. Otherwise,enter a new label and click <OK>. Thiswill bring up a prompt to save the data.Enter a file name and click <Save>, or<Cancel> to avoid saving the data. Thecalibration may be saved later during thesession by selecting <File>, <Save As> inthe calibration display menu.

g. After completing the file save dialog, thenoise calibration display shown in Figure5-5 will be visible.

Use the <Up/Down Arrow> keys to scrollthrough the data table in the lower window.The parameter values displayed in theupper window are those at the markerfrequency. Use the <Left/Right Arrow> keysto move the marker in the swept frequency

Figure 5-8. Typical Setup for Performing Power/Intermod Measurements

Page 75: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-13

display through the calibrated frequencies.Highlight and click on <Marker> at the leftof the window to go to a specific frequencyof interest. Left click with the mouse pointerbetween calibrated frequencies to obtaininterpolated parameter values. Highlightand click on a parameter to bring up theparameter selection box and change, add,or delete displayed parameters. Highlightand click on the maximum and minimumscale values for the parameters plotted on theswept display to modify the vertical scales.

h. Press the <Esc> key or click on the closewindow box to return to the Block Diagramview. To retrieve the noise calibration datawhile it is still in memory select <View>,<Noise>, and <Cal Data> from the menu barin Block Diagram view. To retrieve previouslystored calibration data, select <Calibrate>,<Noise>, <Get Cal File>, and select the fileto be displayed.

5.4 Power Calibration

5.4.1 The power measurement system shouldtypically be set up per Figure 5-6 with a thru inplace of the DUT. The available power at theinput of the source tuner will be measuredover a range of programmed power levels ateach frequency. If the setup includes theoptional input and/or reflection power metersand couplers, the respective coupling valueswill be measured.

If the "Cal RF source match" option has beenset to YES (see Section 4.6.3, Power OptionsEditor), the tuner will move to severalpositions in order to determine the reflectioncoefficient looking back into the RF source.The same tuner positions will also create thereflection needed to measure the reflectioncoupling.

During the power calibration, a power sensorfile (one for each of the output power sensors)and a thru 2-port s-parameter file will be

needed. The power sensor file contains theefficiency, loss and reflection coefficientvalues of the output power sensor. If theoptional input power sensor and/or reflectionpower sensors are used, they will be calibratedby the fundamental output power meter, so noinput or reflected power sensor files areneeded. The thru does not need to be perfect,but must have known s-parameters in a file.

☞ NOTE: If using a reflection power meter, therange on the power head will need to be in theappropriate range. If not, the power head will bereading noise and will average an extensiveamount.

5.4.2 The sequence of the power calibration isas follows:

a. Select <Calibrate>, <Power>, <New Cal>from the Block Diagram view menu.

b. The available frequency range, whichconsists of those frequencies common toboth tuners, and the current frequencyrange will be displayed. The currentfrequencies will be the same as thoseavailable unless a subset had beenpreviously selected.

The default thru file name will be pre-typed on the entry line. If another file isrequired, select <Browse> to find the fileor type the file name in the entry box.

The programmed power range of the signalsource is also displayed here. This rangeshould be based on the capabilities of theprogrammable power source, the amountof gain or loss between the source and theDUT, and the amount of power required atthe DUT. The available power will bemeasured at each power level; therefore,no assumptions are made regarding thelinearity of the power source or optionalamplifier. Accept the displayed range orenter a new one.

Page 76: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

5-14 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

☞ NOTE: If an input power meter is used, themeasurement range is not restricted to thecalibrated range, so a single power level maybe sufficient here. However, if the RF source(or power amplifier, if needed) is non-linear,more calibration levels may provide betterstarting estimates of the programmed powerrequired to provide the desired power at theDUT. This could reduce the measurement time.

When all desired measurement conditionshave been entered, select <OK> to startthe calibration.

c. The program will then read the outputpower sensor files established in the SetupFiles menu and then do an on-line check toinsure that all required instruments are inplace and connected to the GPIB.

d. The completion of the on-line check willbring up a prompt to insert the thru inplace of the DUT. When this is done, click<OK>.

e. The next series of prompts instructs theuser to calibrate each power sensor in thesystem by connecting a sensor to the powerreference in its associated power meterand then reconnecting it to the system afterthe meter has completed its calibrationroutine. Click <OK> at the completion ofeach step.

The power sensor calibration sequencecan be avoided by selecting <SKIP> at thefirst prompt for the output power meter;however, it is recommended that the powersensors be calibrated at least once at thestart of each session. Subsequently, zeroingmay be sufficient if the power meters arestable.

f. At the completion of the last power metercalibration and the system is assumed tobe stabilized, the power meter(s) will bezeroed unless “Prompt for PM Zero” had

been previously set to <Yes> in the<Setup>, <Options>, <Power> dialog ofthe Block Diagram view menu. In thiscase, the completion of the power metercalibration routine will bring up a promptand the program will stop. This featurepermits the user to manually disable the RFpower at the power source(s) and/oramplifier if these do not have this capabilityvia a GPIB command. When the RF poweris disabled, click <OK>. The meter(s) willthen be zeroed, and a second prompt willappear. Re-enable the RF power and click<OK>. The procedure can be bypassed byclicking on <SKIP> at the first prompt (notrecommended).

g. The next prompt asks whether the tuners areto be re-initialized. Click <Y> if the tunershave not been recently initialized. Wheninitialization is complete (or if <N> isselected) the actual calibration will begin.The available power levels corresponding tothe programmed power levels will be scrolledon the screen. If the data seems invalid, press<End> to abort the calibration. The programwill revert to the Block Diagram view. Select<Setup> and <Go to local> to troubleshootthe system

h. When the calibration is complete, a promptto enter a label will appear. If this was thefirst calibration of the session, the labelentry line will be blank. If an earliercalibration had been completed andlabeled, that label will appear on the entryline. Select <Don’t Change> to accept thelabel shown or, if the line is blank, to skipthis step and not apply a label. Otherwise,enter a new label and click <OK>. Thiswill bring up a prompt to save the data.Enter a file name and click <Save>, or<Cancel> to avoid saving the data. Thecalibration may be saved later during thesession by selecting <File>, <Save As> inthe calibration display menu.

Page 77: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 5-15

i. Use the scroll bar on the right of the displayto move through the data. <Page up> orthe <Page Down> keys will move the dataa page at a time. Press the <Esc> key orclick on the close window box to return tothe Block Diagram view.

To retrieve the power calibration data whileit is still in memory select <View>,<Power>, and <Cal Data> from the menubar in the Block Diagram view.

To retrieve previously stored calibrationdata, select <Calibrate>, <Noise>, <GetCal File>, and select the file to be displayed.

5.5 Intermod Calibration

The 2-tone intermodulation measurementsystem should be set up per Figure 5-8.

To calibrate for intermod, select <Calibrate>from the SNPW Menu, <Intermod> and then<New Cal>. If the <Intermod> option is notavailable, check that both tuners have beencalibrated.

The calibration for intermod includeseverything in the standard power calibration,plus calibration of RF source 2 and thespectrum analyzer coupler.

The user interaction is identical to the powercalibration, except that the offset of RF Source2 compared to RF Source 1 should be entered.This nominal offset is used as a starting point insetting the power level of RF source 2 to beequal to that of RF source 1. Accuracy here isnot crucial, but will help speed up thecalibration process.

The calibration of RF source 2 is done whilethe thru is in place. At each power level forevery frequency, RF source 2 will be alsoturned on after the available power from RFsource 1 is calibrated with the output powermeter. The spectrum analyzer will then readthe two carrier levels, and RF source 2 power

level will be adjusted until they are equalwithin the specified equality tolerance. If thespecified equality tolerance cannot beachieved, an error message will be given andthe calibration aborted.

Calibration of the RF coupler for the spectrumanalyzer is done at the same time ascalibration of RF source 2. Since the carriersignal from RF source 1 is already measuredwith the power meter, a comparison to thespectrum analyzer reading provides thespectrum analyzer coupling value.

After the RF source 2 and the spectrumanalyzer coupler are calibrated, RF source 2 isturned off, and the calibration continues at thenext power level or frequency.

5.6 ACP Calibration

To calibrate for Adjacent Channel Power(ACP), select <Calibrate> from the SNPWMenu, and then <ACP> and <New Cal>.

The ACP calibration is identical to the Powercal, except that it will be done with theselected modulation on. Therefore, seeSection 5.4 for the calibration sequence.

5.7 SNP System Calibration

The SNP System calibration does a complete,unified calibration for s-parameter, noise, andpower measurements. Tuner files may be usedwith automatic reference plane shifting, or thetuners may be characterized in place.

The system calibration is controlled by wizardwhich walks you through the process, step bystep. When the process is complete, the newmeasured files will be saved so that simplercalibrations may be used in the future. Thenew measured files will also be entered as thedefaults, so the configuration can be savedwith the complete setup.

Page 78: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 79: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 6-1

6.1 Introduction

The SNPW program includes a generalpurpose s-parameter measurement functionusing a calibrated vector network analyzer(VNA). All s-parameter data files are savedusing a Touchstone™ 1 compatible format.

☞ NOTE: Before making s-parameter measure-ments, the appropraite Calibration Menufunction must be executed, or the s-parametermeasurement menu items will not beavailable. See Section 5.2 for details on thes-parameter calibration functions.

6.2 1-Port Measurements

a. Calibrate the VNA for either 1-port or2-port measurements per Section 5.2.Connect the DUT to the VNA.

b. From the Block Diagram view menu, select<Measure>, <S-Parameters>, and <1-Port>to bring up the measurement dialog.

c. The available and current frequency rangeswill be displayed. The available frequencieswill be the VNA calibration frequencies.The current frequencies will either be thesame or a sub-set (if one had beenpreviously selected). Follow the on-screeninstructions to modify the measurementfrequencies if necessary. Note that if anuncalibrated frequency is added, a promptindicating that it is not a sub-set of theavailable frequencies will come up.

d. Use the parameter button in the lowerleft corner of the dialog to select themeasurement parameter (11 = S11,22 = S22), then click on <Measure>.

e. When the measurement is complete, aprompt to enter a label will appear. SeeSection 6.4 for instructions on labelingand saving the data.

6S-Parameter Measurements

f. The s-parameter display shows the selectedparameter on a Smith chart. Use the <Left/Right Arrow> keys to move through thefrequency range. The parameter value ateach frequency is displayed on the left sideof the screen. To display the parametervalue at a specific frequency: select<View>, <Marker Frequency> from themenu bar; highlight and click on <MarkerFrequency>; or, press <Ctrl-F>. Then selectthe frequency from the pop-up window.

g. Press <Esc> or click on the Close Windowbox to exit the display and return to theBlock Diagram view. The display can berecalled while it is still in memory byselecting <View>, <S-parameters>, and<Memory>.

6.3 2-Port Measurements

6.3.1 Fixed Bias Measurements

a. Calibrate the VNA for 2-port measure-ments, and de-embed the calibration (ifnecessary) per Section 5.2. Connect theDUT to the VNA.

b. From the Block Diagram view menu, select<Measure>, <S-Parameters>, and <2-Port>to bring up the measurement dialog.

c. The available and current frequency rangeswill be displayed. The available frequencieswill be the VNA calibration frequencies.The current frequencies will either be thesame or a sub-set (if one had beenpreviously selected). Follow the on-screeninstructions to modify the measurementfrequencies if necessary. Note that if anuncalibrated frequency is added, a promptindicating that it is not a sub-set of theavailable frequencies will come up.

d. Note the conditions displayed in the DCBias dialog section. If the DUT requiresdifferent conditions, Click <Details> tobring up the DC Bias Setup dialog. Refer to

1 Touchstone™ is a trademark of HP EEsof, Inc.

Page 80: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

6-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Section 4.6.2 for entry details. Be aware,however, that a change here will bereflected in the earl ier <Setup>,<Instruments> and <Setup>, <Options>bias editors. If the DUT does not requirebias, click <none> on the “Bias Mode,Specify” line of the DC Bias Setup editor.

e. When the frequency and bias conditions arecorrectly set, click <Measure>. When themeasurement is complete, a prompt to entera label will appear. See Section 6.4 forinstructions on labeling and saving the data.

f. The s-parameter display (see Figure 6-1)shows all four parameters on a Smith chart(reflection) and a polar chart (transmission).Use the <Left/Right Arrow> keys to movethrough the frequency range. Theparameter values at each frequency aredisplayed on the left side of the screen. Todisplay the values at a specific frequency:select <View >, <Marker Frequency> fromthe menu bar; highlight and click on

<Marker Frequency>; or, press <Ctrl-F>.Then select the frequency from the pop-upwindow.

g. Press <Esc> or click on the Close Windowbox to exit the display and return to theBlock Diagram view. The display can berecalled while it is still in memory byselecting <View>, <S-Parameters>,<Memory>.

6.3.1 Swept Bias Measurements

a. Calibrate the VNA for 2-port measurements,and de-embed the calibration (if necessary)per Section 5.2. Connect the DUT to theVNA.

b. From the Block Diagram view menu, select<Measure>, <S-Parameters>, and <2-Portvs Bias> to bring up the measurementdialog.

c. The available and current frequency rangeswill be displayed. The available frequencies

Figure 6-1. Typical S-Parameter Display

Page 81: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 6-3

will be the VNA calibration frequencies.The current frequencies will either be thesame or a sub-set (if one had been previouslyselected). Follow the on-screen instructionsto modify the measurement frequencies ifnecessary. Note that if an uncalibratedfrequency is added, a prompt indicating thatit is not a sub-set of the available frequencieswill come up.

d. The bias mode and the current swept biassetup are also displayed here. If the mode,bias limits, or other options need to bechanged, click <Details> to bring up the DCBias Setup dialog. Refer to Section 4.5.2 forentry details. Be aware, however, that achange here will be reflected in the earlier<Setup>, <Instruments> and <Setup>,<Options> bias editors. Select <OK> toreturn to the 2-Port s-Parameter Measurementvs Bias dialog box.

Select the swept bias variable by clicking onthe <Bias Variable:> button to toggle betweenI_out (mA) and V_out (Volts). This selectioncan also be made from the DC Bias Setupdialog.

e. When the frequency and bias conditions arecorrectly set, click <Measure>. When themeasurement is complete, a prompt to entera label will appear. See Section 6.4 forinstructions on labeling and saving the data.The swept bias data is saved in a Touchstonecompatible MDIF format. See the Touchstonemanual Truth Model information for detailson usage of the swept bias data file.

f. The s-parameter display shows all fourparameters on a Smith chart (reflection) anda polar chart (transmission). The display issimilar to Figure 6-1 except that the dataapplies to a single bias value shown at thebottom of the screen. Use the <Left/RightArrow> keys to move through the frequencyrange. The parameter values at eachfrequency are displayed on the left side ofthe screen. To display the values at a specific

frequency: select <View>, <MarkerFrequency> from the menu bar; highlightand click on <Marker Frequency>; or, press<Ctrl-F>. Then select the frequency from thepop-up window.

g. Use the <Up/Down Arrow> keys to movethrough the bias range. To display the valuesat a specific bias value, select <View>, <BiasMarker> from the menu bar; or highlight andclick on <Bias> at the bottom of the screen.Then select the bias value from the pop-upwindow.

h. Press <Esc> or click on the Close Windowbox to exit the display and return to the BlockDiagram view. The display can be recalledwhile it is still in memory by selecting<View>, <S-Parameters>, <Memory>.

6.4 Saving S-Parameter Data

When a measurement is complete, a prompt willappear to label the data. If this was the firstmeasurement of the session, the label entry linewill be blank. If an earlier measurement hadbeen completed and labeled, that label willappear on the entry line. Select <Don’t Change>to accept the label shown or, if the line is blank,to skip this step and not apply a label. Otherwise,enter a new label and click <OK>. This will bringup a prompt to save the data. Enter a file nameand click <Save>, or click <Cancel> to bypasssaving the data. The data may be saved laterduring the session by selecting <File>, <SaveAs> in the s-parameter display menu. Theprogram will automatically apply the extension“.S1P” to 1-port s-parameter files, “.S2P” to2-port, fixed bias s-parameter files, and “.S2B”to swept bias, 2-port s-parameter files.

6.5 Recalling S-Parameter Data

S-parameter files can be brought back intomemory and displayed from the Block Diagramview menu. Select <View>, <S-Parameters>,and the file type (1-Port, etc.), then select the filefor display.

Page 82: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 83: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-1

7.1 General

The SNPW program provides for measuring avariety of power parameters at any availablesource and load impedance combination. Themeasurement is corrected for tuner losses toprovide data at the DUT reference plane.Single power measurements, swept powermeasurements, load pull and source pull canall be done from an interactive graphicalscreen menu.

The system must first be calibrated for poweror intermod. If a power calibration has notbeen done, the <Power> option in theMeasurement Menu will not be active.

7.2 Power Parameters

Forty-one standard power parameters plus anarray of user defined parameters may bemeasured with any power measurement, if theappropriate equipment is available in theblock diagram. These are:

a. Available Input Power (Pin_avail):

This is the available power at the DUTinput plane. It is normally specified as anindependent parameter. However, if theoption "Snap to Cal'd Power" is set to YES(see Section 4.5.3), then the value willvary with the source tuner loss. If "Snap toCal'd Power" is set to NO, then the powerlevel of the RF source will be adjusted tokeep the available power at the DUT inputplane constant within the specifiedtolerance.

b. Delivered Input Power (Pin_deliv):

This is the power actually delivered to theinput reference plane of the device. Thisvalue necessarily depends upon sourcetuner matching. A reflection power meteris required.

c. Reflection Coefficient Magnitude (Refl_coef):

This is the voltage ratio of the reflected signal tothe available signal at the DUT reference plane.

7Power Measurements

d. Return Loss (Refl_log):

This is return loss in dB at the DUT plane.It is equal to 20*log10 (Refl_coef). A bettermatch will result in a more negative numberin dB.

e. Output Power (Pout):

This is the power delivered to the loadseen by the DUT. This is displayed in dBm.

f. Transducer Gain (Gt):

This is a ratio of the delivered outputpower to the available input power at theDUT reference planes, displayed in dB.This parameter requires an output powermeter.

g. Power Gain (Gp):

This is a ratio of the delivered outputpower to the delivered input power at theDUT reference planes. This is displayed indB. This parameter requires an outputpower meter and a reflection power meter.This is normally not a function of sourceimpedance, except as it changes theoperating point of the DUT because ofchanges in delivered power.

h. Power Added Efficiency (Eff):

This is the ratio of added RF power to theDC input power. The added RF power is thedelivered output power minus the deliveredinput power. This is displayed in percent.The formula is:

Eff = 100 * (POUT delivered – PIN_delivered)

DC power

Where

DC power = V_out * I_out + V_in * I_in

If the delivered input power is not knownbecause there is no reflection power meter,then the available input power is used.

Page 84: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Since available power is always greaterthan (or equal to) the delivered power, thiswill reduce the calculated power added,therefore reducing the calculatedefficiency. This error can be eliminated bymatching the source impedance, butotherwise will produce a conservativeresult.

i. Measured Voltages and Currents (V_out,I_out, V_in, I_in, V_aux1, I_aux1, V_aux2,I_aux2, V_aux3, I_aux3, V_aux4, I_aux4):These parameters are the measured inputand output DC voltages and currents. Thosedesignated *_aux* are associated withauxiliary bias supplies used when they areused.

☞ NOTE: These bias parameters will be availablewhenever a nonzero output voltage is specified.

j. Source Reflection Coefficient Magnitude atthe 2nd Harmonic (Γs_2nd_mag):This parameter is available only if the sourcetuner has data at the 2nd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

k. Source Reflection Coefficient Phase at the2nd Harmonic (Γs_2nd_phase):This parameter is available only if the sourcetuner has data at the 2nd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

l. Source Reflection Coefficient Magnitude atthe 3rd Harmonic (Γs_3rd_mag):This parameter is available only if the sourcetuner has data at the 3rd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

m. Source Reflection Coefficient Phase at the3rd Harmonic (Γs_3rd_phase):This parameter is available only if the sourcetuner has data at the 3rd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

n. Load Reflection Coefficient Magnitude atthe 2nd Harmonic (Γld_2nd_mag):This parameter is available only if the load

tuner has data at the 2nd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

o. Load Reflection Coefficient Phase at the2nd Harmonic (Γld_2nd_phase):This parameter is available only if the loadtuner has data at the 2nd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

p. Load Reflection Coefficient Magnitude atthe 3rd Harmonic (Γld_3rd_mag):This parameter is available only if the loadtuner has data at the 3rd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

q. Load Reflection Coefficient Phase at the3rd Harmonic (Γld_3rd_phase):This parameter is available only if the loadtuner has data at the 3rd harmonic of themeasurement frequency.

r. Power at the 2nd Harmonic Frequency(C_2nd):This parameter is the DUT output power atthe 2nd harmonic of the measurementfrequency (see the note following sub-paragraphs).

s. Power at the 3rd Harmonic Frequency(C_3rd):This parameter is the DUT output power atthe 3rd harmonic of the measurementfrequency (see the following note).

☞ NOTE: When only fundamental tuners areused, harmonic power is measured with aspectrum analyzer and can be measured onlyif the following is true:

1) The system must be calibrated forintermodulation distortion (intermod orImod), even though the harmonic power(s)may be measured from the <Power> menu,because the intermod calibration isrequired to determine the spectrumanalyzer coupler and losses.

Page 85: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-3

2) The load tuner file must have data at theharmonics of the measurement frequencyin order to de-embed the tuner losses.

When harmonic tuners are used, theharmonic power(s) can be measured witha power meter.

t. Gain Compression:This parameter is available only from a sweptpower measurement. This may be a singlepower sweep or a swept load/source pull.

u. Gain Expansion:This parameter is the gain increase from ameasured linear or maximum gain value. Itis available only from a swept powermeasurement. This may be a single powersweep or a swept load/source pull.

v. Spurious Signal Power (Spurious):Spurious signal power is measured with aspectrum analyzer. See Note 1) precedingsub-paragraph (t) above.

w. Spurious Frequency (Spur_freq):Spurious signals are detected and measuredwith a spectrum analyzer. See Note 1)preceding sub-paragraph (t) above.

x. Measured Frequency (Meas_freq):This is the measured frequency in GHz,measured with a frequency meter.

y. Input Reflection Coefficient Magnitude(Γin_mag):This is the magnitude of theDUT input reflection coefficient, measuredwith a vector receiver.

z. Input Reflection Coefficient Phase(Γin_pha): This is a phase of the DUTinput reflection coefficient in degrees,measured with a vector receiver.

aa. Transmission Phase (Trans_pha):This is the uncalibrated transmission phasethrough the DUT in degrees, measuredwith a vector receiver. It is required forAM to PM conversion measurements.

bb. AM to PM Conversion (am/pm):This is the ratio of transmission phasechange to output power change in degrees/dB. Therefore, it requires both Trans_phaand Pout. It is available only from a sweptpower measurement. This may be a basicswept power measurement or a swept load/source pull.

cc. Calculated Transducer Gain (Gt(s)):This parameter is the transducer gain calculatedfrom the small signal s-parameters. See Section7.18 for details on the use of Gt(s).

dd. Transducer Gain Differential (Delta_Gt):This parameter is the difference betweenGt(s) and Gt, the transducer gain derivedfrom an actual power measurement. SeeSection 7.18 for details on the use of Delta_Gt.

ee. User Functions (User):This is an optional array of parametersdefined by a user written measurementdriver. Each user parameter can be anyscalar value which varies as a function ofpower or impedance. See Section 7.11and Appendix 3.

7.3 Power Measurement Screen

7.3.1 Getting to the Measurement Screen

To do a power measurement, select<Measure> from the SNPW menu, and<Power> from the Measurement Menu. Thisbrings up the power measurement dialog.Select a frequency from the list of availablecalibrated frequencies. Also, the current biaslevels are displayed, and new values may beentered here, if needed. To change the biasmode, bias limits, and other bias options, click<Details>.

If small signal s-parameters are to be used, clickthe box and the <Read S-Parameter File> buttonto read and display the s-parameters. To view thes-parameters already in memory, click <ShowS-Parameters>.

Page 86: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

When frequency, bias, and s-parameters areset up, click <OK> to bring up themeasurement screen shown in Figure 7-1.

The left Smith Chart on the measurementscreen shows the source impedances seen bythe DUT. The right chart shows the loadimpedances. Harmonic tuner charts will belabeled Source2 or Load2 for the 2ndharmonic and Source3 or Load3 for the 3rdharmonic.

If the DUT s-parameters are selected, S11conjugate and S22 conjugate will be plotted assmall yellow triangles. If the stability factor "k"is less than one (indicating a potentiallyunstable device as calculated from thes-parameters), the stability circles will also beshown as white plots.

7.3.2 Selecting Tuner Charts for Display

The Smith charts with the points for each tunermay be turned on or off individually in thisdisplay. From the menu, select <View>, then<Tuners>, and then the tuner to toggle on oroff from the display. Check marks identify theselected tuners on the menu.

7.3.3 Zoom Function

The "Zoom Window" function allows anyregion of the Smith chart to be magnified.Click the right mouse button while pointing toeither the left (source) or right (load) chart,then click <Zoom Window> on the popupmenu. Then click and hold the left mousebutton while dragging the box enclosing thearea to be magnified (similar to Figure 7-2).This can be repeated to progressively zoom inuntil the maximum zoom ration is reached.

Figure 7-1. Power Measurement Screen

Page 87: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-5

☞ NOTE: If the drag box is not square, thelarger dimension is used, since the result isalways square.

Click the right mouse button on the expandedchart and select <Zoom all> to restore thechart to the normal view.

7.3.4 Selecting Points

7.3.4.1 Single Point Selection

As the mouse cursor moves over either chart,the reflection coefficient or impedance at thecursor position is continuously displayed

immediately below the chart. Click the leftmouse button while the pointer is in a chartand the nearest tuner point will be toggledbetween selected and not selected. The colorof selected points is green. Non-selectedpoints are gray. This function selects themeasurement points for a load or source pull.

7.3.4.2 Block Point Selection

Block point selection is used to make a largeblock of tuner positions either available orunavailable for load/source pullmeasurements. See Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2. Block Point Selection

Page 88: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Click the right mouse button while pointing tothe desired chart. Choose <Select Points ON>or <Select Points OFF> and then click andhold down the left mouse button whiledragging the mouse pointer until the points tobe turned ON/OFF are enclosed in therectangle. This process may be repeated.

☞ NOTE: A selected set of impedances for load/source pull can be saved by saving the tuner file.See Section 5.1.5.

7.3.4.3 Measurement Default Point

The measurement default position is the tunersetting which will be used for a single or sweptpower measurement. It is indicated on thescreen by a white box around the point.

To move the default point, click the right mousebutton while pointing to the desired chart.Choose <Select Default Point> from the menu,and then move the square cursor to the newdesired position, and click the left button.

The default point may also be moved byspecifying an impedance or reflectioncoefficient. Click the right mouse button whilethe pointer is in a chart, then select <EnterDefault point> and enter the desired defaultpoint position in the pop-up window.

☞ NOTE: If <Interpolated Tuning> had beenselected in the <Setup>, <Options>, <Power>editor, the default point will move to the exactposition selected or entered. If this option is setto <No>, the default point will move to thenearest calibrated tuner position.

Figure 7-3. Measurement Parameter Selection Editor

Page 89: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-7

☞ NOTE: The tuners do not move immediatelywhen the default point is changed. To move thetuners to the default positions, select <Measure>and then <Move Tuners> from the menu.

7.3.5 Measurement Setup

Most of the measurement options can beaccessed from the measurement screen byhighlighting and clicking on <Setup>.

7.3.5.1 Selecting Measurement Parameters

Select <Setup>, <Select Parameters> to openthe Measurement Parameter Selectionwindow with a list of all available parameters.See figure 7-3.

Double-click on any parameter to select it.Double-click on a selected parameter todeselect i t . Selected parameters arehighlighted in blue. After making the selection,click <Move Up>, <Move Down>, <Move toTop> or <Move to End> to adjust the measuredparameters order. Press <OK> to return to themeasurement screen.

Selection of some parameters depends onothers. For example, “Pout” is required forgain and efficiency. Also, the intermod signals(I3, I5, etc.) are required for carrier to intermodratios (C/I3, etc.).

7.3.5.2 Changing Frequency

Select <Setup>, <Frequency> to open thefrequency selection window. Use the <Up/Down Arrow> keys or point and click with themouse to highlight the desired measurementfrequency, then click <OK>.

7.3.5.3 Changing the Input Power Level

Select <Setup>, <Power Level> to open thepower level entry window. If “Snap to Cal’dPower” had been set to <Yes> in the <Setup>,<Options>, <Power> editor, this entry willadjust to the nearest calibrated power level.

The displayed power level is the available inputpower level at the DUT input reference plane. If"Snap to Cal'd Power" is YES, this depends on thedissipative losses of the source tuner, and thevalue may change as the source measurementdefault impedance is changed. If the option"Snap to Cal'd Power" is set to NO, the availablepower will not change with the source tuner,since the RF source power will be adjusted tocompensate for the loss change.

Click on the button alongside “Power SettingMode:” to select this mode as either constantinput or output power. If <Constant Pout> isselected, the input power will be adjustedupward from the input power declared on thescreen until the selected output power or themaximum is attained.

7.3.5.4 Changing Bias

If <Bias> is selected, the current bias value willbe displayed, and new bias values may beentered.

7.3.5.5 Options

If <Options> is selected, the correspondingoptions dialog box will come up. These are thesame as described in Sections 4.6.3, 4.6.4,and 4.6.5.

If <Default Files/Directories...> is selected,the Default Files and Directories propertysheet will come up. This is the same asdescribed in section 4.5.

7.3.6 Going to Local

Move the mouse pointer to highlight<Measure>, <Go to Local>, and click the leftbutton to put the whole system into Localcontrol. This allows the system to be checkedmanually.

Page 90: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

This is often useful for gaining a "feel" for theoperation, and for troubleshootingunexpected results.

7.4 Single Power Measurements

After all setup conditions are established(frequency, bias, power level, etc., see thepreceding sections), this measurement mode canbe used to make a single measurement of allenabled parameters with the tuners set to thedefault positions (see Section 7.3.4.3). From themenu bar select <Measure>, <SingleMeasurement> (or click on the singlemeasurement icon at the top left of the screen(rectangle with a center dot). The tuners willmove, the bias will be set, the RF power will beset to the selected value, and the active powerparameters will be measured.

The measured data will be displayed in asingle column on the right of the screen. If thedata extends past the bottom of the screen, usethe vertical scroll bar on the right to move it upor down. If the data extends past the right ofthe screen use the horizontal scroll bar tomove it left or right. Alternatively, click anddrag the vertical window divider to increasethe width of the data window.

7.5 Power Sweep

This mode can be used to make a series ofmeasurements of all enabled parameters with thetuners set at the default positions while the inputpower is stepped over a selected range.

Figure 7-4. Swept Power Display

Page 91: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-9

7.5.1 Swept Power Measurements

After all setup conditions are established(frequency, bias, power level, etc., see thepreceding sections), set the default positions ofthe tuners (see Section 7.3.4.3), and enable theparameters to be measured (see Section 7.3.5.1).From the menu bar select <Measure>, <PowerSweep> (or click on the power sweep icon at thetop left of the screen (rectangle with a diagonalline). This will bring up a prompt showing thecalibrated available input power range, thecurrent power range, and the maximum gaincompression limit. Select <OK> to accept thecurrent values or enter new values.

☞ NOTE: If an input power meter is used theavailable calibrated power range will NOT bedisplayed here, because it is irrelevant. Withan input power meter, the measurement powerrange is unrestricted (except for the physicallimits of the equipment in use.

After entry of the power range, the tuners willmove, the bias will be set, the RF power will beenabled and the power sweep will begin with thelowest power level. At each power level, theactive parameters will be measured andprogressively plotted on the screen. Press <End>to abort the sweep.

Completion of the power sweep will bring up aprompt to label the data. See Section 7.15 forinstructions on applying a label and saving thedata.

7.5.2 Swept Power Display

The interactive Swept Power Display will plot themeasured power parameters versus input availablepower in the upper part of the screen and displaythe tabular data below. See Figure 7-4.

A maximum of five parameters may bedisplayed. See Section 7.5.2.1 for instructionson selecting the displayed parameters from thelist of those made active in the setupprocedures.

7.5.2.1 Graphical Display

At the left of the upper window, themeasurement frequency, the parameter valuesat the marker position for each of thoseselected, the available input power at themarker position, and the maximum andminimum scale limits for each parameter aredisplayed. The parameters are plotted on thegraph on the right side of the window. Theparameter designations, scales, and values atthe marker position are displayed in the samecolors as their respective plotted traces. Abright vertical line identifies the markerposition on the graph.

To change the displayed parameters to otherson the list of active parameters, use the mouseto highlight and left-click on any parameterdesignation in the upper window. This willbring up the “Parameter Selection for SweptDisplay”. The procedure for selection, de-selection, and movement of the parameterswithin the selection display is identical to thatdescribed in Section 7.3.5.1 with oneexception: selection of more than fiveparameters will bring up a prompt to deselectone before adding another. Note also thatsome parameters, such as ”compression” and”expansion” may have been added to theparameter list, as these are available only in aswept power measurement.

Any of the following procedures can be used tomove the marker to discrete measured points:

a) Use the <Left/Right Arrow> keys tomove successively through the inputpower range;

b) Use the mouse pointer to highlight andleft-click on “Marker” at the left of thedisplay, select a power level and click<OK>.

c) From the menu bar select <View >,<Marker>, select a power level andclick <OK>.

Page 92: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-10 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Click on the plot between calibrated points todisplay interpolated data.

If the plot of a parameter is compressed or goesoff scale, the scale range may be changed.Highlight and left-click the maximum orminimum scale value for the parameter. Entera value and click <OK> in the pop-upwindow.

The 1 dB compression point may be found bymaking “compression” one of the plottedparameters and moving the marker to find theinput power (and other parameters) at which itoccurs.

7.5.2.2 Tabular Display

The lower window of the swept power displaytabulates the measured data. The parametersshown are those selected in the graphicaldisplay. Use the <Up/Down Arrow> keys orthe scroll bar on the right of the window toview the data if the listing extends past thebottom of the screen. Alternatively, click on,hold and drag the horizontal window dividerto expand the tabular listing (at the expense ofthe graphical display).

7.5.2.3 Surfer Swept Display

The Enhanced Graphics option, ModelMT993NO7, provides Surfer, a third partygraphics software package, to display theswept data in a flexible window that can bemodified by the user. This option will formatthe swept data and load it into Surfer. SeeSection 12 for details on the EnhancedGraphics option.

7.6 Bias Sweep

This measurement mode steps the bias valueover a selected range with the tuners set to thedefault position.

After all setup conditions are established(frequency, bias, power level, etc., see thepreceding sections), set the default positions

of the tuners (see Section 7.3.4.3), and enablethe parameters to be measured (see Section7.3.5.1). From the menu bar select<Measure>, <Bias Sweep> or click on the biassweep icon at the top left of the screen(rectangle enclosing “BS”). This will bring upa prompt showing the current bias setup andthe bias variable range. Click <Details> tobring up the bias editor and change the setup(see Section 4.5.2). If necessary, enter newvalues for the bias variable range. Otherwise,i f the condit ions and bias range areacceptable, click <OK>.

After entry of the swept bias setup, the tunerswill move, the bias will be set to the lowestlevel of the variable range, the RF power willbe set and the bias sweep will begin. At eachbias level, the active parameters will bemeasured and progressively plotted on thescreen. Press <End> to abort the sweep.

Completion of the bias sweep will bring up aprompt to label the data. See Section 7.15 forinstructions on applying a label and saving thedata.

The swept bias display is identical to the sweptpower display except that the variable is thebias value. See Section 7.5.2 for instructionson manipulating the display.

7.7 VSWR Circle Measurements

This mode provides measured data of theactive parameters at those tuner positionsclosest to a specified VSWR circle on the Smithchart (Power Measurement View).

After all setup conditions are established(frequency, bias, power level, etc., see thepreceding sections), enable the parameters tobe measured (see Section 7.3.5.1). Select<Measure>, <VSWR Circle> from the menubar, or click on the icon at the top left of thescreen (rectangle enclosing a circle) to bringup the measurement setup dialog box. Enter

Page 93: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-11

the VSWR, and the phase start and stop values.If necessary, enter a reflection coefficient orimpedance to specify the center of the circle.When the entries are completed, click <Start>.

The bias will be set, and the RF power turned on.The tuner will move to those positions closest tothe specified VSWR circle, and the activeparameters will be measured at each position. Ateach tuner position the tuner impedance and themeasured data are displayed at the bottom of thescreen, and a line is drawn on the Smith chartfrom the preceding point eventually describingthe VSWR circle (or arc if less than 360 degreeswas specified in the setup dialog).

☞ NOTE: If “Interpolated Tuning” was set to<No> in the options setup, the circle or arcmay be distorted as the calibrated tuner posi-tions may not fall exactly on the VSWR circle.If this option was set to <Yes>, a true circle willbe drawn and the data derived from interpo-lated tuner positions.

Completion of the VSWR circle measurementswill bring up the “Fixed Pull vs. PhaseDisplay” and a prompt to label the data. SeeSection 7.15 for instructions on applying alabel and saving the data.

The swept phase display is identical to theswept power display except that the variable is

Figure 7-5. Load Pull Contour Display

Page 94: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-12 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

the phase. See Section 7.5.2 for instructions onmanipulating the display.

7.8 Load Pull

Load pull measurements may be made withconstant input power or constant outputpower. Prior to a load pull measurement, thePower Setting Mode must be set to one of theseoptions. Select <Setup><PowerLevel...> fromthe power measurement screen menu, andclick the button to toggle the choices.

7.8.1 Load Pull Measurements

After all setup conditions are established(frequency, bias, power level, etc., see thepreceding sections), set the source tunerreflection coefficient (see section 7.3.4.3) andselect the block of points on the load tunerchart to be used for the measurement (seeSection 7.3.4.2). From the menu bar select<Measure>, <Load Pull> or click on the singlemeasurement icon at the top left of the screen(rectangle enclosing “LP”). The bias will beset, the RF power will turn on, and the tunerswill begin to move to each selected load point.Progress can be monitored by watching eachpoint change from green to yellow as it ismeasured. The measurement parameters andthe load point will be displayed in a singlecolumn on the right of the screen as each pointis finished, during the load pull.

Completion of the load pull will bring up aprompt to label the data. See Section 7.15 forinstructions on applying a label and saving thedata.

☞ NOTE: The load pull data will be saved withthe file extension ".lp" for the fundamentalfrequency, ".lp2" for the 2nd harmonic, and".lp3" for the 3rd harmonic.

The load pull data will then be displayed, asshown in Figure 7-5. See Section 7.8.2 fordetails on this display.

☞ NOTE: After a load pull, the load cursor for thecurrent frequency will be set to the measuredload point which produced the best value forthe optimization parameter, if the option to“Move Default Z from pull data” is enabled.(The optimization parameter may be changedby selecting <View><Options...> from theLoad Pull display menu). See Figure 7-6.

7.8.2 Load Pull Display

The interactive Load Pull Display plotsconstant contours of selected parameters onthe load reflection coefficient plane. Up tothree parameters may be selected from the listof measured power parameters.

To select the parameters to be plotted, movethe mouse pointer to highlight any currentparameter name and click the left mousebutton, or select <View>, <Parameters> fromthe load pull display menu bar. A screen similarto Figure 7-3 will now be displayed. Doubleclick on a desired parameter to toggle itsselection on or off. A maximum of threeparameters may be selected for a contourdisplay.

Figure 7-6. Contour Display Setup Dialog

Page 95: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-13

To change the number of contours and the stepsize between contours for the parameterscurrently displayed, move the mouse pointerto highlight the value to be changed and clickthe left mouse button, or select <View>,<Contour Scales> from the load pull displaymenu bar. Then enter the new value(s) in thedialog window. The contour value closest tothe optimum value will be computed byrounding off to the multiple of the step sizevalue that is nearest to the computed optimumvalue. Contours may be calculated aroundeither a maximum or minimum depending onthe nature of the particular parameter. Totoggle this selection for a particular parameter,first display the contours of that parameters,then highlight the word "min" or "max" withthe mouse pointer and click the left mousebutton.

To zoom in on a portion of the chart, right-clickon the chart to bring up the pop-up menu. SeeSection 7.3.3 for details.

If the “Show measured points” option is set to<Yes> (see Section 7.8.3), all but one aredisplayed as green +’s. The point plotted as awhite square is that which would be selected asthe new default position based on theoptimization parameter.

The measured data at any discrete measuredpoint can be displayed by pointing the mousepointer at the desired measured point on thechart, and clicking the left mouse button. Thisis a way of comparing the actual measureddata against the calculated contours. The datais displayed in a single column in the right sidewindow. If the data extends past the bottom of thescreen, use the scroll bar at the right of thewindow to move it up or down. If some lines ofdata extend past the right of the screen, click,hold, and drag the vertical window separationbar until the full line(s) are visible. Note however,that this will crop the contour display. Click<View>, <Single Point Data> to turn off thesingle point list display.

7.8.3 Load Pull Display Setup

Select <View>, <Options> from the load pulldisplay screen to bring up the Contour DisplaySetup dialog box shown in Figure 7-6.

The Optimization parameter may be selectedfrom the list of available measurementparameters. After a load pull (or source pull)the new default position will be selected as themeasured point which gives the best value forthis parameter.

The Reflection Format toggles betweenreflection coefficient and Impedance. Thisdetermines the format of the reflection datadisplayed on the power measurement anddisplay screens. It may also be set in the SystemOptions Editor described in Section 4.5.1.

The Normalization Impedance defines thereference impedance at the center of the Smithcharts in all of the Power Measurement anddisplay screens. It may also be set in the SystemOptions Editor described in Section 4.5.1.

The Chart Scale Max defines the maximumReflection Coefficient value at the edge of thedisplayed chart.

The Calculation resolution should normallybe a number between 50 and 100. A highernumber produces smoother and moreaccurate plots, but takes longer. A smallnumber is faster, but less accurate, and straightline segments may be visible in the contours.

The contours are calculated over a rectangulararea, based on the points selected. Sometimesa high resolution will produce anomalouscontours in areas not surrounded by measuredpoints. This can usually be corrected byreducing the calculation resolution.

“Interpolate single data” refers to the single pointmeasurement that occurs when the mouse isclicked inside the contour display. If set to<No>, the data will be that at the nearestcalibrated tuner point. If set to <Yes>, the data

Page 96: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-14 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

will be interpolated between calibrated tunerpoints.

If the "Show measured points" option is set toYES, the measured points will be displayedwith the contours in the Load Pull Display. Ifset to NO, the contours will be displayedwithout the measured points.

7.8.4 Shifting the Data Reference Planes

Select <Reference Plane> to shift the referenceplane of the measured data and the contoursthrough a 2-port network defined by 2-ports-parameters in a file.

<Reference Plane><Deembed> will prompt fora 2-port s-parameter file name which de-embedstoward the DUT plane, allowing a fixture to bede-embedded AFTER the measurement. (This isnormally done by de-embedding the tuner databefore the measurement.)

<Reference Plane>, <Embed> will prompt for a2-port s-parameter file name which adds amatching network, shifting the plane away fromthe DUT. This can predict how well a matchingnetwork design will work before it is built.

The two <Reference Plane> options areopposites. If either one is done after the other,with the same s-parameters, the displayeddata will return to the original reference plane.

7.8.5 Saving Contour Data in Spreadsheet Files

The contour data may be saved to aspreadsheet compatible fi le while thecontours are displayed. The spreadsheet fileuses tab delimiters, and a spreadsheetprogram such as Microsoft Excel can read itand present 3D displays of the contour data.

To save contour data in a spreadsheet file, firstdisplay the desired contours as described inSection 7.8.2, and then select <File><SaveSpreadsheet>. If multiple contours aredisplayed, they will all be saved in thespreadsheet file.

When prompted, enter the desired file name tosave the contour data (the default extension of.xls will be added automatically). The file withcontour data for the currently selectedparameters will then be saved.

To access the saved spreadsheet files, launchthe spreadsheet program. Then followinstructions of the spreadsheet program to pullup and display the spreadsheet data. Forexample, Microsoft Excel has menus fordisplaying either 2D or 3D contours, andmany options for adjusting the viewing angle,perspective, colors, and other displayvariables.

7.8.6 Surfer Contour Display

The Enhanced Graphics option, ModelMT993NO7, provides Surfer, a third partygraphics software package, to display thecontour data in a flexible window that can bemodified by the user. This option will formatthe contour data and load it into Surfer. SeeSection 12 for details on the EnhancedGraphics option.

7.8.7 Incremental Mode

If the contours displayed do not fully cover thearea of interest, it may be necessary to addmeasurement points. This can be donewithout a complete re-measurement of allpoints if “Incremental Mode” was checked inthe <Measure> menu. From the powermeasurement screen, select <Measure>,<Incremental Mode>. Use the point selectionprocedure (see Section 7.3.4) to add the newpoints. Start the measurement as described inSection 7.8.1. The system will then measureonly the new points and display the combinedresults.

7.9 Source Pull

Source pull measurements are made in thesame manner as load pull. Select <SourcePull> from the Power measurement menu orclick on the icon at the upper left of the screen

Page 97: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-15

Figure 7-7. Harmonic Impedance Control Display

Figure 7-8. Sweep Plan Setup Dialog

Page 98: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-16 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

(rectangle enclosing “SP”) and follow thepattern of Section 7.8.1.

7.10 Harmonic Source/Load Tuning

Harmonic Tuning uses separate tuners tomove the impedance at the harmonicsindependently from the fundamentalfrequency. Figure 7-7 shows the PowerMeasurement Screen with the second andthird harmonic tuner charts displayed. Theadditional tuner charts are selected in themeasurements setup editor. See Section 7.3.2.

Harmonic source and load pull measurementsare made in essentially the same manner asthose at the fundamental. From theMeasurement View menu bar select<Measure>, <Load Pull> or <Source Pull>.

When the dialog box appears, select the tunerto be pulled, then follow the pattern of Section7.8.1.

7.11 Optimum Search

The optimum search feature provides a fast,efficient means of determining the impedance orreflection coefficient that optimizes a specifiedparameter without resorting to a full-up pullmeasurement. It is available for bothfundamental and harmonic setups. From theMeasurement View menu select <Measure>,<Optimum search>. When the dialog boxappears, select the parameter to be optimizedand whether the optimum is a maximum orminimum. Select the tuner to be pulled, thenclick on <Start>.

Figure 7-9. Progressive Display During Sweep Plan Measurement

Page 99: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-17

When the measurement is complete, theoptimum impedance will be shown on theselected tuner chart as a white rectangle. Leftclick on the point to select it on, then do a singlepoint measurement to bring up the data listing atthat point. See Section 7.4 for single pointmeasurement and display details.

7.12 Sweep Plan

The sweep plan feature provides for sweepingpower, bias, and impedance of multiple tunersover a frequency range.

7.12.1 Sweep Plan Measurements

Sweep plan measurements are initially set upfrom the Power Measurement view (seeSection 7.3).

Select the parameters to be measured.

At every frequency in the plan:

Select the default position for each tuner inthe setup. This is important because when aselected tuner is being pulled, all others areset to their respective default positions.

Select the measurement points for each tunerto be pulled. A minimum of seven points isrequired if contours are to be plotted.

When these conditions are set for eachfrequency, select <Measure>, <Sweep Plan>from the menu bar or click on the icon at thetop left of the screen (rectangle enclosing“PLN”) to bring up the Sweep Plan Setupdialog. See Figure 7-8.

If the setup had been previously saved, click on<Read File> and open the file. Otherwise:

Within the setup dialog box:

Enter the measurement frequencies.

Select the tuner(s) to be pulled – fundamentalsource and/or load.

Enter the bias range. The bias variable maybe selected from the bias values that arespecified for the current bias mode.

Enter the maximum compression input level.If this level is reached during any of thesweeps, the sweep will terminate early andgo on to the next sweep.

To save the setup without actually startingthe measurement, click <Save File> andenter a file name.

Click <Next> to bring up the File name Entrybox. Since a sweep plan may entail a rather largenumber of measurements, and may often rununattended, the program asks for a file name tosave the data automatically at the end of themeasurement. This step may be bypassed, but itis not recommended. Sweep plan data will besaved with the file extension “.spl”.

Click <Finish> to start the measurements.Since the power sweep is the fastest movingvariable, the progressive display will show aseries of power sweeps for each selected tunerimpedance at the start frequency and lowestbias level. See Section 7-9. When allimpedances have been swept, the process willrepeat at the next frequency. When all

Figure 7-10. Sweep Plan Display Setup

Page 100: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-18 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

frequencies have been measured, the systemwill repeat the entire sequence at the next biaslevel. The process will continue until all biaslevels, frequencies, and tuner points havebeen swept.

Press <End> to abort the measurement.

7.12.2 Sweep Plan Display

The sweep plan display provides versatileviewing of the multidimensional sweep plandata. It includes flexible contour displays atthe various tuner impedance planes, andswept displays versus input power, bias, andfrequency. An individual sweep at oneimpedance point versus power, bias, orfrequency may also be displayed.

7.12.3 Sweep Plan Display Setup

When the Sweep Plan Display is first started, theSweep Plan Display dialog shown in Figure 7-10will come up. This dialog may also be broughtup after the display is showing by clicking<View><Parameters> from the Sweep PlanDisplay menu.

Marker value for frequency, bias and inputpower should be entered. These will applywhen that parameter is not a variable in asweep or contour calculation.

The sweep variable may be frequency, bias orinput power. This is used if a swept display isselected.

Figure 7-11. Sweep Plan Swept Display

Page 101: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-19

Figure 7-12. Sweep Plan Contour Display

Figure 7-13. Specification Editor

Page 102: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-20 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

The display tuner may be toggled through thetuners that were pulled during the sweep planmeasurement. This will determine the tunerimpedance plane for plotting contours, andalso the impedance plane for showing andselecting points for the swept display.

For the contour display, each contour set maybe toggled on or off by selecting the contournumber. To select the parameters to beplotted, click the buttons in the "DisplayParameter" column.

Contours of any measured parameter may bedisplayed with any other measured parameterat a fixed value. Select the fixed parameter inthe same manner as the display parameter.Enter the desired values in the "Fixed Value"column. The resulting contours will all be atthe active parameter values which meet thefixed parameter value. Up to three contoursets may be overlaid. This allows oneparameter to be examined under differentconditions, as well as the overlay of multipleparameters.

☞ NOTE: The criteria for a given contour maynot be met at all measured impedance points.In this case, the contour calculation will bebased only on the subset where the criteria ismet. The number of points in the subset will beshown on the line with the contour criteria. Ifthe subset has fewer than 7 points, the contourwill not be calculated.

Selecting <Display Sweep> will bring up theswept display. Section 7.9.4.

Selecting <Display contour> will bring up theswept load/source pull display. See Section7.12.4.

7.12.4 Sweep Plan Swept Display

An example of the Sweep Plan Swept Displayis shown in Figure 7-11. The swept data of up

to five parameters is shown on the rectangularchart. Selecting parameters, changing scalesor moving the marker is the same as with theswept power display described in section7.5.2.

If the independent parameter is input power orbias, the Smith chart will show the impedancepoints where data was measured at theselected tuner plane. Click on a point, and theswept display will change to show the sweptdata for that impedance.

If the independent parameter is frequency,then the Smith chart will show the selectedimpedance at each frequency in the sweep.

To change just the selected parameters in theswept display, highlight the parameter nameand click on it. The available measuredparameters may be toggled on or off by doubleclicking.

Select <View>, <Parameters> to go back to theSweep Plan Display dialog.

7.12.5 Sweep Plan Contour Display

An example of a Sweep Plan Contour Displayis shown in Figure 7-12. It is very similar to thefixed pull display except that a line describingthe fixed condition is added to each block ofdisplay parameter information at the left of thescreen.

See section 7.8.2 for details on this display.

7.13 Setting Specifications

Specifications may be set for any subset ofmeasured parameters in any powermeasurement contour display. A contour willbe drawn showing the Smith Chart regionwhere all the specif ications are metsimultaneously. Such a contour is shown in

Page 103: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-21

the Sweep Plan Contour Display, Figure 7-12.The result is a target region which will beacceptable for the matching network design. Ifany one of the specification values are not metthen the failure is reported.

Select <View><Specifications> to bring upthe Specification Editor. This has a list of allavailable parameters as shown in Figure 7-13.Click on the check box in the Select column totoggle whether a particular parameter has aspecification or not. The specification valuecan be entered in the Specifications columnfor each parameter.

7.14 The User Functions

The "user functions" use a user programmablemeasurement driver to allow special or uniquemeasurements to be set up. For theseparameters to be useful, the programmableuser module must be programmed.

There are five functions in the user modulethat relate to power:

a. The user_online_check routine will becalled right after the standard on-line check.The purpose is to check if the "user"instruments are on line, and to put them ina safe state with no SRQ's or other GPIBeffects. This routine is called at thebeginning of a normal calibration, or whena calibration file is read.

b. The user_cal_power routine is called afterthe normal power, intermod, or ACPcalibration is complete. The purpose is toallow special calibration sequences to beprogrammed by the user when needed tosupport the user function or the userinstruments.

c. The user_init_meas_power routine will becalled when the power measurementscreen is first entered so equipment can beset up into the desired operating mode.

This routine also returns the number of userfunctions that will be in the array and sets upthe string arrays with the names of eachparameter and the units of each parameter.

d. The user_pre_meas_power routine is calledas soon as the bias, RF power, and tunersare set. It is called prior to measurement ofselected built-in parameters, so specialmeasurement conditions may be set up.

A flag returns to indicate whether tocontinue or abort. This can be used tocheck for conditions which could burn outa device. For example, if a destructivevalue of gate current or drain current isdetected, the flag could be set to “abort”.In that case, the power and bias willimmediately be turned off and themeasurement aborted.

e. The user_function_power routine is calledfor every power measurement point andreturns an array of power parameters. Thisroutine is called after all standardparameters which are selected have beenmeasured.

All of the data related to the measurementpoint is sent to this routine. This includesinstrument information, calibration data,raw and de-embedded measured data fromthe selected built-in parameters for thispoint. This provides a lot of flexibility. Thisfunction can: a) create new parameterswhich are just calculations, b) create newparameters which are measured by thisroutine, and c) recalculate the built-inparameters to change assumptions orcalculation methods.

The default user module provided with thedistribution software will return zero arrayelements during real measurements. Indemo mode, an array of twenty five valuesproportional to output power will be usedto illustrate how it can work.

Page 104: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

7-22 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

See Appendix 3 for information onprogramming custom drivers.

7.15 Saving Measured Power Files

Completion of a power measurement willbring up a prompt to label the data. If this is thefirst measurement of the session, the entry linewill be blank (or if no label was assigned to aprior measurement). Enter a label and click<OK>, or click <Don’t Change> to accept thecurrent label or to bypass this step if the entryline is blank. The next prompt will ask for a filename to save the data. Enter a file name andclick <Save>, or click <Cancel> if the data isnot to be saved.

The program will assign a unique extension toeach measurement type. These extensions canbe changed; however, it is not recommendedas the program may have difficulty finding thefile at a later time.

7.16 Displaying Measured Power Data

Previously measured power data can be readfrom a file into memory. To display previouslymeasured power data, go to the BlockDiagram View menu, and select <View>,<Power>, and the type of power data,(<Source Pull>, <Load Pull>, <PowerSweep> or <Sweep Plan>) then <Memory>,or <File>.

The power data will then be displayed asdescribed in those sections relative to the typeof data (swept power, contour, etc.).

7.17 Displaying Power Calibration Data

To display the power calibration data, go tothe Block Diagram View menu, and select<View>, <Power> and then <Cal Data>.Review the cal data by scrolling through thetabular list.

7.18 Gt(s) and Delta_Gt

These two parameters are useful in verifyingthe integrity of the s-parameters that describethe various system blocks. Gt(s) is thetransducer gain calculated from s-parameters(as opposed to Gt, which is derived from theactual measurement). Delta_Gt is thedifference between the two, i.e.: Gt(s) – Gt.This parameter is very sensitive and mostlyshows errors due to s-parameter interaction. Itgenerally indicates errors in network analyzercalibrations used for measurements of thesystem blocks.

The typical application is after a powercalibration. The s-parameters in memory willbe those of the thru. Leave the thru in place.From the Block Diagram view select<Measure>, <Power> to bring up the powermeasurement dialog. Select a frequency, setthe bias to “none”, and make certain the “UseS-Parameters” box is checked, See Section7.3.1 for details on these procedures. Click<OK> to bring up the Power Measurementview.

Start the VSWR circle measurement routine(see Section 7.7). In the setup dialog, enter avery large VSWR (e.g.: 50:1) and the start andstop phase at 0 and 360 degrees, respectively.This will insure that the phase will be sweptaround the entire outer edge of the Smithchart. Click <Start> to make the measurement.

When the swept phase display comes up,select Gt(s) and Delta_Gt as the displayedparameters (see Section 7.5.2). Typically, Gtand Gt(s) will be about a 6 to 8 dB loss. Theerrors will add at some phase values andsubtract at others. Delta_Gt will, therefore,usually have a sinusoidal pattern. A peak-to-peak ripple of about 0.2 dB is nominal andacceptable. If the ripple exceeds 0.5 dB peak-to-peak, it is suggested that the s-parameters ofthe system blocks be re-examined foraccuracy.

Page 105: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 7-23

A sinusoidal pattern offset from zero usuallyindicates a non-linearity in the system. Theoutput power sensor is generally the mostsuspect. Often, the power levels are outside ofits optimum range. Do a power sweep with thethru still in place (See Section 7.5) andexamine the gain flatness to check for thispossibility.

7.19 Oscillator Measurements

The Snpw program can be used to makeoscillator power measurements. Poweroutput, frequency, and other parameters ofoscillators may be measured using all themeasurement types described earlier in thischapter except swept input power andfrequency. System calibration is not requiredsince there is no RF source to be calibrated.

From the Block Diagram view select<Measure>, <Oscillator> to bring up the setup

dialog. Complete the entries in the dialog asoutlined in Section 7.3.1. The measurementscreen that comes up is identical inappearance and function to that described inSection 7.3 except that available input powerwill not be displayed and the power sweepicon will be blank. Single point, load pull, andthe variety of measurements described inSections 7.3 through 7.14 may now be made.

At the completion of a measurement the entirelist of enabled parameters will be displayed.Some of these, such as transducer and powergain will be disabled since they have nomeaning in an oscillator measurement. SeeSection 7.3.5. If a spectrum analyzer isincluded in the setup spurious signals andharmonics can also be measured.

The measured data may be saved and recalledin the same manner as described in Sections7.15 and 7.16, respectively.

Page 106: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 107: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 8-1

8.1 General

In general, intermodulation distort ion(intermod) measurements are the same as thestandard power measurement except thateighteen additional parameters are available.These are:

a. C: Power of the carrier signal in dBm.

b. Carrier_up: Power at the upper two-tonecarrier frequency in dBm.

c. Carrier_lo: Power at the lower two-tonecarrier frequency in dBm.

d. I3: Power of the third order inter-modulation signal in dBm.

e. I3_up: Power at the upper frequency ofthe third order intermodulation signal indBm.

f. I3_lo: Power at the lower frequency ofthe third order intermodulation signal indBm.

g. C/I3: Ratio of carrier power to the powerof the third order intermodulation signal.

h. IP3: Third order intercept point.

i. I5: Power of the fifth order inter-modulation signal in dBm.

j. I5_up: Power at the upper frequency ofthe fifth order intermodulation signal indBm.

k. I5_lo: Power at the lower frequency ofthe fifth order intermodulation signal indBm.

l. C/I5: Ratio of carrier power to the powerof the fifth order intermodulation signal.

m. IP5: Fifth order intercept point.

n. I7: Power of the seventh order inter-modulation signal in dBm.

o. I7_up: Power at the upper frequency ofthe seventh order intermodulation signalin dBm.

p. I7_lo: Power at the lower frequency ofthe seventh order intermodulation signalin dBm.

8Intermodulation Distortion Measurements

q. C/I7: Ratio of carrier power to the powerof the seventh order intermodulationsignal.

r. IP7: Seventh order intercept point

These parameters are discussed further inAppendix 6, “The Theory of IntermodulationDistortion Measurements”.

8.2 Intermod Measurements

The intermod measurement is identical to asingle-tone (CW) power measurement exceptthat the measurement is made with twosignals or tones applied. From the blockdiagram view, select <Measure>, <Intermod>to bring up the setup dialog. Follow thepattern of Section 7.3.1 to set the measure-ment conditions (frequency, bias, etc.). Whenthese conditions are set, click <OK> to bringup the measurement screen. This is the sameas that shown in Figure 7-1 and described inSection 7.3.1 except for the note “(two tone)”at the top of the screen.

All subsequent measurements are made in thesame manner as described in Section 7, PowerMeasurements. This applies to single point,swept power and bias, pull measurements,etc. Follow the instructions in Section 7 forperforming these measurements.

Intermodulation distortion measurementsmay be toggled on and off by selecting or de-selecting I3, I5, and I7 from the parameterselection table (see Section 7.3.5.1). Thecarrier, C/I ratios and intercept points willdepend on the activation of these threeparameters.

☞ NOTE: If no intermod parameters are selected,the power measurements will still be done with the2-tone RF input. This makes all of the parameterscorrespond to each other relative to total inputpower and saturation.

☞ NOTE: Single-tone measurements may be madeby selecting <Measure>, <Power> from the BlockDiagram view menu – even though the systemwas calibrated for intermod.

Page 108: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

8-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 8-1. Swept Intermod Display

8.3 Displaying Intermod Data

The parameter displays for intermod areidentical to those described in Section 7 forpower parameters. Refer to Section 7 fordetails on the various types of measurementsand displays.

The Swept display of intermod data is espec-ially useful in checking for the proper powerrange for determining IP3. An example is shownin Figure 8-1. Note that the scale range for Poutis one-third that for I3, and the two traces areparallel. This is a result of the 3:1 ratio in theslope of the two parameters (see Appendix 6).

Page 109: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 9-1

9.1 General

Adjacent channel power (ACP) measurementsare a test of how much modulated power in aspecific frequency channel spills over intoadjacent channels. The modulated signalcontains a band of frequencies, and non-linearities will cause intermodulation distortionamong the various frequencies. This producespower at new frequencies, causing interferencewith signals in the adjacent channels.

The phenomena tested with adjacent channelpower measurements is similar to that of the2-tone intermod test, except that ACP ismeasured with a specific, typically digital,modulation format.

Measurement of ACP as a function of impedanceallows matching networks to be optimized forthe specific modulation type, rather than forgeneral purpose use.

☞ NOTE: Measurement parameters specific toadjacent channel power are set in the ACP op-tions. See Section 4.5.6 for details on settingthese parameters.

The ACP measurement is an extension of thepower measurement. It adds eight newparameters that can be selected just like the otherpower or intermod parameters. The eight newparameters are:

a. acp_adj_up: The ratio, expressed in dB, of thepower in the upper adjacent channel to thatin the signal channel.

b. acp_adj_lo: The ratio, expressed in dB, of thepower in the lower adjacent channel to that inthe signal channel.

c. acp_alt_up: The ratio, expressed in dB, of thepower in the upper alternate adjacentchannel to that in the signal channel.

d. acp_alt_lo: The ratio, expressed in dB, of thepower in the lower alternate adjacentchannel to that in the signal channel.

9Adjacent Channel Power Measurements

e. acp_alt2_up: The ratio, expressed in dB, ofthe power in the 2nd upper alternate adjacentchannel to that in the signal channel.

f. acp_alt2_lo: The ratio, expressed in dB, of thepower in the 2nd lower alternate adjacentchannel to that in the signal channel.

g. acp_ve_rms: The RMS vector error of therecovered, digitally modulated signal. This isalso known as error vector magnitude (EVM).

h. acp_ph_err: The phase error of therecovered, digitally modulated signal.

9.2 ACP Measurements

The ACP measurement is identical to powermeasurements except that all measurements aremade with a modulated source, and the ACPparameters listed above are added to the list ofavailable parameters. From the block diagramview, select <Measure>, <ACP> to bring up thesetup dialog. Follow the pattern of Section 7.3.1to set the measurement conditions (frequency,bias, etc.). When these conditions are set click<OK> to bring up the measurement screen. Thisis the same as that shown in Figure 7-1 anddescribed in Section 7.3.1 except for the note“(ACP)” at the top of the screen.

All subsequent measurements are made in thesame manner as described in Section 7, PowerMeasurements. This applies to single point,swept power and bias, pull measurements, etc.Follow the instructions in Section 7 forperforming these measurements.

☞ NOTE: Many RF sources and their drivers are notset up for digital modulation. In this case, thespecified modulation settings will be ignored andmeasurement of the ACP parameters will causeerrors.

9.3 Displaying ACP Data

The parameter displays for ACP are identical tothose described in Section 7 for powerparameters. Refer to Section 7 for details on thevarious types of measurements and displays.

Page 110: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 111: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-1

10.1 General

The SNPW Noise Characterization programprovides for automatic noise parametermeasurements. Three measurement con-ditions are available:

a. Noise parameters versus frequency at asingle bias level,

b. Noise parameters versus bias at a singlefrequency.

c. Noise parameters at a single frequencyusing an interactive graphical menu,

Noise parameters are determined bymeasuring noise power at each of a variety ofsource tuner positions at each frequency orbias level. The program then computes anddisplays the noise parameters.

The most common noise parameter setconsists of:

a. Fmin: The minimum noise figure of thedevice

b. ΓΓΓΓΓopt: The complex source reflectioncoefficient at which Fmin occurs.

c. rn: The equivalent noise resistance of thedevice normalized to 50 ohms.

☞ NOTE: See Appendix 5, Theory of NoiseMeasurement, for more details on theseparameters.

The following parameters are also available:

d. k: The stability factor calculated using thedevice s-parameters. A value less thanunity indicates a potentially unstabledevice.

10Noise Measurements

e. Gmax: The maximum available gaincalculated using the device s-parameters.This becomes maximum stable gain whenk is less than unity.

f. ΓΓΓΓΓgain: The complex source reflectioncoefficient at which Gmax occurs. Γgain isnot available when k is less than unity.

g. Assoc_gain: The available gain of thedevice when the source reflectioncoefficient equals Γopt.

h. Assoc_NF: The noise figure of the devicewhen the source reflection coefficientequals Ggain.

i. N_Lange: Lange’s reference plane invariantparameter1.

J. UserX: The user functions comprise anoptional array of up to 25 parametersdefined by a user-written driver. Each userparameter can be a scalar value that variesas a function of noise or impedance. SeeAppendix 3 for more information on user-defined functions.

Before starting a measurement, it is highlyrecommended that the setup optionsdescribed in Section 4.6.3 be carefullyreviewed, particularly with regard to pointselection method, number of source points,and calculation method. For the beginninguser, it is recommended that these be set to“Automatic”, “12”, and “Math1” respectively.

The calculations used to derive noiseparameters from the measured noise powerdata require knowledge of the DUTs-parameters. Unless an on-line vectornetwork analyzer is used, these s-parametersmust be measured off-line and stored in anaccessible file. See Chapter 6 for detailedinstructions on s-parameter measurements.

1 Julius Lange, IEEE Journal of SSC, June 1967, pp37-40.

Page 112: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

10.2 Swept Frequency

The swept frequency mode measures the noiseparameters of the device under test (DUT) overa range of frequencies at one bias level.Graphical and Tabular displays of the noiseand gain parameters are provided after themeasurement.

10.2.1 Swept Frequency Noise Measurements

Calibrate the system for noise measurements(see Section 5.3). From the Block DiagramView menu, select <Measure>, <Noise>,<Sweep Freq> to bring up the startup dialog.The available (calibrated) frequency range isshown at the top of the screen. The current, ormost recently measured frequency range isalso displayed. Follow the on-screeninstructions to add or delete frequencies. If theentire available range is to be measured, andthe dialog shows a subset, click <Set toAvailable Frequencies>.

In the “Bias Mode” box, click on <Details> tochange the bias mode and values if necessary.Refer to Section 4.6.2 for instructions on biassettings. When all entries are complete, click<OK> to continue.

If the S-parameter Mode is set to “Use Files”,the browse dialog to select the DUT s-parameter file will then appear. Refer toSection 6 for information on measuring andstoring the DUT s-parameters. Select or enterthe file name under which the DUT s-parameters are stored. When the file isopened, the s-parameters will then bedisplayed. After veri fying that the s-parameters are correct, click <OK> to start themeasurement. The bias will then come onbefore starting the noise measurements.

If the S-parameters Mode is set to “OnlineVNA”, the tuners will move to the Z0 position,the bias will come on, and the DUT s-parameters will be measured.

After the s-parameters are acquired and thebias is set, the noise measurement will begin.The load tuner will move to its one selectedposition (at the start frequency), and the noisepower at the start frequency will be measuredat each selected source tuner position (seesections 10.4.4 and 10.4.5 for point selectiondetails). When all the source positions havebeen measured, the program will use thecurrently selected solution method (seeSection 10.4.8) to compute the noiseparameters. The gain parameters arecalculated using the device s-parameters. Ifthere is no solution, the contingent point(s)will be measured and the computationrepeated. The measurement will then proceedto the next frequency.

As the measurements at each frequency arecompleted the results are tabulated andplotted on-screen. Completion of themeasurements at the stop frequency will bringup a prompt to label and save the data. Referto Section 10.6 for labeling and savinginstructions.

☞ NOTE: The swept frequency noise data will besaved in a Touchstone compatible file with thefile extension “.SF”.

The swept noise data will then be displayed , asshown in Figure 10-1. See Section 10.2.2 fordetails on this display.

☞ NOTE: If the MANUAL point selection optionwas chosen, be sure to select points at everyfrequency before attempting sweptmeasurements, otherwise the result will be “nosolution”.

10.2.2 Swept Noise Display

The graphical, interactive Swept NoiseDisplay (see Figure 10-1) will plot themeasured noise parameters vs. frequency orbias in the upper part of the screen and displaythe tabular data below.

Page 113: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-3

Up to five parameter may be displayed at onetime. Scalar parameters, such as Fmin, rn, andthe maximum gain, are plotted on therectangular chart, and complex parameters,such as Γopt and Γgain are plotted on a Smithchart. Γgain is the source reflectioncoeff icient which produces maximumavailable gain. A unique value for Γgain onlyexists if the stability factor “k” is greater than orequal to one, so if “k” is less than one, Γgainwill not be plotted. At the left of the screen, theminimum and maximum scale limits aredisplayed for the parameters plotted on therectangular chart.

The current marker values are displayed for all theactive parameters. The marker position on therectangular chart is identified by a bright verticalline. The markers on the Smith chart are small

bright squares on the reflection coefficientcurves.The marker position value is displayed justbelow the parameter listing on the left of thegraphic window.

Use the scroll bar or the up/down arrows to scrollthe tabulated data if the list is too long to fit in thetabular window.

10.2.2.1 Selecting Displayed Parameters

To bring up the Noise Parameter Selection Window,as shown on Figure 10-2, point the mouse tohighlight the parameter name and click the leftbutton. This allows selection of alternate noiseparameter sets, and turning on and off of individualparameter plots.

Figure 10-1. Swept Noise Display

Page 114: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Some parameters are alternate but equivalent formsof the same noise paramter data. Fmin,Γopt, rn

make up the traditional and most commonly usedset, but other forms have advantages in someapplications. For example, N_Lange is the Lange’sreference plane invariant parameter2. The noiseuser function may also add parameters here.

In the Noise Parameter Selection Window, click ona parameter to toggle it on or off. Click on <MoveUp>, <Move Down>, <Move to Top>, or <Moveto End> to change the order of the parameters in thedisplay.

When the plot is on, the parameter name andmarker value wil be displayed in the same color as

the plotted trace. When the plot is off, the markervalue is also turned off, and the marker name willchange to a gray color.

10.2.2.2 Changing Scales

The scaling on the rectangular chart isindependent for each parameter. The scalesmay be changed to accommodate the plotteddata. Highlight and click on a scale valuebelow a parameter name to change just thatone value. Select <View><Scales> from themenu bar to change the values for more thanone parameter at a time.

☞ NOTE: The scaling values selected in this displayfor each parameter will be saved if theconfiguration file is saved.

Figure 10-2. Noise Parameter Selection Display

2 Ibid.

Page 115: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-5

10.2.2.3 Selecting the Marker Position

The marker may be moved in three ways:

a. Move the marker to discrete measured pointswith the left or right arrow keys.

b. Move the marker to interpolated points bymoving the mouse pointer to the desiredhorizontal position in the rectangular chartand clicking the left mouse button.

c. Select the marker value from the marker listfrom <View><Marker>.

10.2.2.4 Displaying Noise, Gain and StabilityCircles

Constant noise figure and gain circles andstability circles may be plotted on the Smithchart. Select <View>, <Circles> from themenu bar. Toggle the circles on or off andenter new values for the number of circles andthe interval between them if necessary. Thegain circles will be visible only at thosefrequencies where the stability factor is greaterthan unity. The stability circles, plotted inwhite, will be visible only at those frequencieswhere the stability factor is less than unity.

10.2.2.5 Smoothing the Plotted Data

Zero, first, or second order smoothing may beapplied to the plotted data to betterunderstand parameter trends and reducerandom variabil i ty. Select <View>,<Smoothing> from the menu bar. Click on asmoothing order. If “Plot Unsmoothed Points”is checked the original data will still be plottedon the screen when <OK> is clicked; however,the tabulated data in both windows will be thatof the smoothed curves.

10.2.2.6 Verification Parameters

Data saved from prior measurements can bebrought into the display and compared to thecurrent data. Select <View>, <Verification>,<File> from the menu bar to bring up the fileselection window. Select the file to becompared. When the file is opened, theprogram will add the noise parameters to theparameter list of the current display; however,these will be labeled Fmin_v, rn_v, and Γopt_vfor identification purposes. The verificationparameters can then be handled in the samemanner as any of the displayed parametersand will appear in the parameter selectiondialog.

If the DUT is a passive device, select <View >,<Verification>, <Passive> from the menu bar.The noise parameters will be calculated fromthe s-parameters of the device and the ambienttemperature. These will then be added to theparameter list as *_v parameters in the samemanner as noted above.

10.2.2.7 Reviewing the Noise Statistics

The Noise Data Statistics screen providesaccess to the measured data and the solutionmethod. This dialog can be used to restrict thedata range and eliminate obviously invaliddata points. Each action in this dialog willresult in a re-calculation of the noiseparameters shown at the bottom of the screenusing any one of the four solution methods.This dialog may be used as a troubleshootingtool in the event a measurement results in nosolution (see Section 10.2.2.8 below). Fromthe menu bar, select <View>, <Statistics> tobring up the Noise Data Statistics screenshown in Figure 10-3.

At each tuner position, the displayed datashows: the magnitude and angle of the sourcereflection coefficient; the measured noise

Page 116: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 10-3. Noise Statistics Dialog

figure, the calculated noise figure using thenoise parameters; and the difference betweenthe measured and calculated noise figures.The noise parameter solution is shown at thebottom of the screen.

Each time a menu item on the right of thescreen is clicked, the solution will berecalculated. These menu items are:

Solution Method: Click the top button totoggle through the four solution methodoptions. When the bottom item is set to“Cal Data”, this button toggles through thenoise load options.

Disable max delta: Disables the data withthe maximum deviation betweenmeasured and calculated noise figures.

Continued clicks will progressivelyeliminate each new “max delta”.

Limit data range: Click and enter a datarange in the pop-up window to disabledata outside the selected range.

Restore all: Reactivates all disabled data.

Delete Unselected: Deletes all points notselected in the data table.

Measured/Cal Data: Toggles between themeasurement data and the calibrationdata. When this item is set to “Cal Data”,the measured calibration points areshown.

Page 117: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-7

10.2.2.8 Noise Parameter Solutions with PoorlyConditioned Data

Occasionally, ill-conditioned data, usually asymptom of an unstable DUT, will cause thecalculation of noise parameters to result in “nosolution”, even after measuring with thecontingent point(s). The SNPW program offerssome potential remedies to that condition.

a. Change the method used to solve for thenoise parameters: “Math1” is the most exactof the solution method options and is generallypreferred; however, it will sometimes fail toprovide a solution. “Math2” uses some minorapproximations and may provide a solutionwhen Math1 fails. “Cold Only” is the mostsensitive to errors and is not recommended.The advantage of “Contour” is that solutionscan often be found even when the data isvery poorly conditioned. It can also display avisual plot that will make problem areas ofthe Smith chart more obvious. A disadvantageof the contour method is that it generallyrequires more measured tuner positions forgood data, and the measurement can takelonger. The easiest way to see the effects ofchanging the solution method is to go to theNoise Data Statistics screen described inSection 10.2.3.3 above. See Section 10.2.3.2above for instructions on changing thesolution method in the interactive screen foran actual measurement.

b. Review the noise data: Refer to Section10.2.3.4 for details on reviewing the noisestatistics.

c. Modify the tuner point selection: Oftenchanging the position, deleting or addingtuner positions will result in a valid solution.In general, no points should be enclosed bythe stability circles, and it is advisable tomove points close to the circles further away.Refer to Section 10.2.2.2 for details onselecting and de-selecting tuner positions.Note that deleting a point will delete the dataonly at that point, and the noise parametersmay still be recalculated with the remaining

data. Adding a point will delete the data at allpoints requiring a new measurement beforethe noise parameters can be displayed.

10.3 Swept Bias

The swept bias mode measures the noiseparameters of the device under test (DUT) overa range of bias levels at one frequency.Graphical and Tabular displays of the noiseand gain parameters are provided after themeasurement.

10.3.1 Swept Bias Noise Measurements

Calibrate the system by noise measurements(See Section 5.3). From the Block DiagramView menu, select <Measure>, <Noise>,<Swept Bias> to bring up the setup dialog.Select a frequency from the list of available(calibrated) frequencies.

In the “Bias Mode” box, click on <Details> tochange teh bias mode, swept variable, andvalue if necessary. Refer to Section 4.5.2 forinstructions on bias settings. Enter the sweptvariable start, stop and step values. When allentries are complete, click <OK> to continue.

If the s-parameter mode is set to “USe Files”,the browse dialog to select the DUT s-parameter file vs. bias will appear then appear.Refer to Section 6 for information onmeasuring and storing the DUT s-parameters.Select or enter the file file under which theDUT s-parameters are stored. When the file isopened, the s-parameters will then bedisplayed. After verifying that the s-parameters are correct, click <OK> to start themeasurement.

☞ NOTE: When the s-parameter mode is to “UseFiles”, the default bias values come from theswept bias s-parameter file, so make sure the biasvariable is the same, and use care not to gooutside the bias range of that file. Extrapolationis not allowed.

Page 118: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

If the s-parameter mode is set to “Online VNA”,the tuners will be moved to the Z0 position, andteh DUT s-parameters will be measured vs. bias,starting with the lowest bias value.

The bias will then turn on at the start level, theload tuner will move to its one selected position,and the noise power at the start frequency will bemeasured at each selected source tuner position(See Section 10.2.2.1 and 10.2.2.2 for pointselection details). When all the source positionshave been measured, the program will use thecurrently selected solution method (See Section10.2.3.2) to compute the noise parameters. Thegain parameters are calculated using the devices-parameters. If there is no solution, the contingentpoint(s) will be measured and the computationrepeated. The measurement will then proceed tothe next bias level.

As the measurements at each bias level arecompleted, the results are tabulated and plottedon-screen. Completion of the measurements atthe stop bias will bring up a prompt to label andsave the data. Refer to Section 10.6 for labelingand saving instructions.

10.3.2 Swept Bias Display

The Swept bias display is identical inappearance and function as the sweptfrequency display except tha the variable isbias. Refer to Section 10.3.2 for operationaland functional details on this display.

10.4 Interactive Noise Measurements

The interactive measurement mode is avaluable tool used to examine the noise andgain performance of the DUT at a singlefrequency:

a. Noise and gain parameters may bemeasured.

b. Point selection and the calculation methodmay be changed to improve the integrity of theresults and make the measurement morerobust.

c. Noise figure may be measured at varioussource and load tuner positions to verify thecalculated parameter data.

10.4.1 Starting Procedure

Calibrate the system for noise measurements(see Section 5.3). From the Block Diagrammenu, select <Measure>, <Noise>,<Interactive> to bring up the startup dialog.

Select a frequency from the list of availablecalibrated frequencies.

In the “Bias Mode” box, click on <Details> tochange the bias mode and values if necessary.Refer to Section 4.5.2 for instructions on biassettings.

In the S-Parameters box: If this is the firstmeasurement of the session, click <ReadS-Parameters> to select the DUT s-parameterfile, or click <Measure S-Parameters> if an on-line VNA is in the setup; if prior measurementshave been made, click <Show S-Parameters>to verify that the s-parameters in memory arethose of the DUT to be measured.

Click <OK> to bring up the InteractiveMeasurement screen.

10.4.2 Interactive Noise Measurement View

The Interactive Noise measurement screenconsists of two Smith charts showing thecalibrated source and load tuner positions (seeFigure 10-4). If a load tuner is not used, thenonly the source Smith chart will show. Theposition of the mouse cursor in a tuner chart iscontinuously displayed just below the chart.The DUT S11 and S22 conjugates aredisplayed as yellow triangles on theirrespective charts. If the DUT stability factor, k,is less than unity, the stability circles areplotted in white. If the stability factor is greaterthan unity, a magenta rectangle identifies thesource reflection coefficient for maximumavailable gain (Γgain).

Page 119: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-9

The selected tuner points are shown in green.Contingent points are shown in magenta.Initially, if no prior measurements have beenmade, there may be no selected positions onthe source chart. The load tuner position usedduring calibration may still be selected.

Contingent points will be used in a noiseparameter measurement if the selected pointsfail to provide a noise parameter solution.

If there is currently raw noise data in memory,the noise parameter solution will be displayedalong with the noise and gain circles if they areselected.

10.4.3 Changing Frequency

Select <Setup><Frequency>, and select afrequency from the list of those available.

10.4.4 Automatic Point Selection

Select <Setup><Auto Select> to automaticallyselect the load and source points using theautomatic algorithm with the noise optionssettings.

The number of automatically selected tunerpositions used for the measurement can beincreased or decreased. Select <Setup>,

Figure 10-4. Interactive Noise Measurement Screen

Page 120: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-10 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

<Options> from the menu bar. Enter the newnumber of points on the “Meas PointSelection” line and click <OK>. When theinteractive screen is again visible, select<Setup>, <Auto Select> from the menu bar.The new tuner positions will then bedisplayed.

Active, available and contingent tunerpositions can be toggled between on and off asdescribed below. These actions are required ateach measurement frequency if the manualpoint selection method was chosen in thesetup options.

10.4.5 Manual Point Selection

As the mouse pointer moves over either chart,the reflection coefficient or impedance isdisplayed immediately below the chart.

If the left mouse button is clicked while thepointer is on the source chart, the nearest tunerpoint will be toggled between selected or notselected. If the left mouse button is clickedwhile on the load chart, the nearest tuner pointwill become the new load position.

☞ NOTE: If noise parameters have already beenmeasured, deleting a source point will delete thenoise data at that point only. The noise parametersmay still be recalculated with the remainingpoints. Adding a source point will cause thenoise data to be deleted for all points, requiringa new measurement before noise parameters canbe displayed.

If the <SHIFT> key is held down and the leftmouse button is clicked while the pointer is oneither chart, the nearest tuner point will betoggled between available or unavailable.This determines which points will be availablefor the automatic point selection. This isuseful to force the automatic selection toavoid points at which the DUT will oscillate.Avoiding oscillation this way normally worksbest by avoiding load points near the stability

circle, and leaving all of the source pointsavailable to get a good selection pattern.

If the <CTRL>(control) key is held down andthe left mouse button is clicked while thepointer is on the source chart, the nearest tunerpoint will be toggled between contingent ornot contingent. Contingent points are used inthe noise parameter measurement if “nosolution” occurs using the selected points.

To select a block of source points, click theright mouse button on the source Smith chart,and select <SelectPointsOn> or<SelectsPointsOff> from the pop up menu.Then move the cross-hair cursor to a startingpoint and hold the left button down whiledragging a rectangle to enclose the desiredpoints. Release the left button to complete theselection.

To select the load point, click the left button onthe desired point on the load Smith chart.Only one point is used at a time, so the currentselection will move to the new impedance.

☞ NOTE: A selected set of impedances for noisemeasurements can be saved by saving the tunerfile. See Section 5.1.4.

☞ CAUTION: Even though the “Avoid UnstablePoints” may be enabled in the noise optionsmenu (See Section 4.5.3), the program will permitmanual selection of potentially unstable tunerpositions within the stability circles. Thesepositions should be avoided unless necessary toobtain a solution to the calculation.

10.4.6 Noise Parameter Measurement

Noise and Gain parameters are availabledirectly from the interactive screen. From themenu bar, select<Measure><Measure noiseparameters>. The bias will turn on, the loadtuner will move to its one selected postion,and the noise power will be measured at eachselected source tuner position. When all thesource positions have been measured, theprogram will use the currently selected solution

Page 121: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-11

method to compute the noise parameters. Thegain parameters are calculated using the devices-parameters. If there is no solution, thecontingent point(s) will be measured and thecomputation repeated.

Figure 10-5 is a typical example of theinteractive screen after the noise parametermeasurement. The noise and gain data aredisplayed at the bottom of the screen. Theoptimum source reflection coefficients forminimum noise figure (Γopt) and maximumavailable gain (Γgain) are identified by blueand magenta rectangles, respectively (the latteronly if the stability factor is greater than unity).

10.4.7 Displaying Constant Noise Figure/GainCircles and Contours

From the menu bar at the top of the interactivescreen, select <View>, <Circles> to bring upthe circle selection dialog box. Toggle theselected circles on or off in the dialog box and,if necessary, enter the new values for thenumber of circles and the interval betweencircles. Note that gain circles are availableonly if the stability factor of the DUT is greaterthan unity at the measurement frequency.

Contours will be displayed only if the contoursolution method was previously selected. To

Figure 10-5. Noise Parameter Measurement Screen

1 Julius Lange, IEEE Journal of SSC, June 1967, pp37-40.

Page 122: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-12 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

select the contour method slick <Setup>,<Option> on the menu bar. Click <Contour>on the “Math Options” line in the optionsdialog And enter a contour resolution. Theresolution is usually a number between 50 to100. A high resolution will result in smoothercontours but will take longer to compute. Alower resolution will compute faster, but thecontours may show some straight-l inesegments. After the contour method is set andthe resolution entered, click <OK> to return tothe interactive screen. Select <View>,<Circles> from the menu bar and enter thenumber of contours and the interval. Click<OK> when finished.

10.4.8 Selecting the Solution Method

There are two methods of solving for the noiseparameters from the Interactive screen:

a. The “DIRECT” method, and

b. The “CONTOUR” method.

The current selection will be checked andwill be used when the noise parameters arecalculated. Ths solution method is selectedby clicking the desired option on the<Setup> menu in the interactive noisemeasurement view.

Selecting (or re-selecting) the solutionmethod will cause re-calculation and displayof the noise parameters if the raw data hasalready been measured (either in theInteractive Menu or by a previous SweptNoise Measurement). If there is no raw Data,then the new selection will just be checked toindicate the selection.

☞ NOTE: Adding points to the point selection orchanging the load point will clear the raw data.This ensures that the solution displayedcorresponds to the current point selection.

The Direct Solution uses all of the overdetermined noise power data, and solves

directly for the four noise parameters using aleast means squares approach. This is themethod always used in the swept frequencymeasurement.

☞ NOTE: From the Direct Solve Method, there is achoice of math algorithms. See Section 4.6.2 fordetails on selecting noise options.

The Contour Solution Method takes the rawdata and solves for noise figure at eachindividual measured source impedance. Itthen draws contours of noise figure. Fmin andΓopt are determined directly from thecontouring algorithm. Once Fmin and Γoptare known, rn is calculated from the everyindividual noise figure measurement andaveraged.

The advantage of the Contour Solution Methodis that solutions can often be found even whenpart of the data is poorly conditioned, such asdue to oscillation. It also can display a visualplot which will make problems at certainareas of the Smith chart easier to see.

A disadvantage of the Contour Solution Methodis that more measured points are normallyneeded to get good data, so the measurementusually takes longer.

To select the calculation resolution for thenoise figure contours, go to the noise tab of theOptions Setup Property sheet (See Setion 4.6.2)and enter a new value.

The calculation resolution should normally bea number between 50 and 100. A highernumber produces smoother and more accurateplots, but takes longer. A small number isquick, but less accurate, and straight linesegments may be visible in the contours.

The contours are calculated over a rectangulararea, based on the points selected. Sometimesa high resolution will produce anomalouscontours in areas not surrounded by measured

Page 123: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 10-13

points. This can usuall be corrected by reducingthe calculation resolution.

10.4.9 Reviewing the Noise Statistics

The noise data statistics screen providesaccess to the raw measured data and thesolution method. This dialog can be used torestrict the the data range and eliminateobviously invalid data points. Select <View><Statistics> from the menu bar. The screenand it’s functions are described in Section10.2.2.7.

10.4.10 Measuring Noise Figure

Noise figure may be measured at any availabletuner position directly from the interactivescreen. Click the right mouse button and select<Measure Noise Figure> from the pop-upwindow. Move the rectangular cursor to thesource tuner position to be measured and clickthe left mouse button. The bias will come on,the tuners will move and the noise figure willbe measured.

For a single noise figure measurement, the hot/cold reflection coefficient of the noise sourceis almost completely taken into account.(There is not enough information available tobe completely rigorous without knowledge ofthe DUT noise parameters.) The small residualerror is reduced by the ENR of the noisesource, and is often smaller than theinstrumentation uncertainties.

After the noise figure is measured,the tunerreflection coefficients and the measured noisefigure will be displayed at the bottom of thescreen under the source tuner chart.

10.4.11 Zoom

The tuner displays can be examined in moredetail by using the zoom function. Click theright mouse button and select <Zoomwindow> from the pop-up menu. Click andhold the left mouse button and drag the

rectangular window over the area of the chartto be magnified. Release the button to see theexpanded view. Click the right button andselect <Zoom all> from the pop-up menu toreturn to the normal view.

10.4.12 Local Operation

The system may be put into the local mode formanual troubleshooting of the instrumentsetup. Select <Measure>, <Go to local>.When finished click <OK> to return to theinteractive view.

10.5 User Functions

The “user functions” use a user programmablemeasurement driver to allow special or uniquemeasurements to be set up. For theseparameters to be useful, the programmableuser module must be programmed.

These are five functions in the user modulethat relate to noise:

a. The user_online_check routine will becalled right after the standard online check.The purpose is to check if the “user”instruments are on line, and to put them toa safe state with no SRQ’s or other GPIBeffects. This routine is called at thebeginning of a normal calibration, or whena calibration file is read.

b. The user_cal_noise routine is called after thenormal noise calibration is complete. Thepurpose is to allow special calibrationsequences to be programmed by the userwhen needed to support the user function orthe user instruments. This routine is called atthe end of a normal calibration.

c. The user_init_meas_noise routine will becalled prior to the start of a noise measurementso equipment can be set up into the desiredoperating mode.

Page 124: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

10-14 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

This routine also returns the number of userfunctions that will be in the array and sets upthe string arrays with the names of eachparameter and the units of each parameter.

d. The user_check_osc_noise routine is calledas soon as the bias, noise source and tunersare set for each position. A flag returns toindicate if an oscillation occured.

e. The user_function_noise routine is called forevery noise measurement point. This allowsthe noise solution to be recalculated if desired.It also allows up to 25 user defined parametersto be calculated or measured.

The Default user module provided with thedistribution software will not do anythingduring real measurements.

10.6 Saving Measured Noise Data

Completion of a noise measurement will bringup a prompt to label the data. If this is the firstmeasurement of the session, the entry line willbe blank (or if no label was assigned to a priormeasurement). Enter a label and click <OK>,or click <Don’t Change> to accept the currentlabel or to bypass this step if the entry line isblank. The next prompt will ask for a file nameto save the data. Enter a file name and click<Save>, or click <Cancel> if the data is not tobe saved.

The program will assign a unique extension toeach measurement type. These extensions canbe changed; however, it is not recommendedas the program may have difficulty finding thefile at a later time. See Appendix 7 for a list ofstandard Snpw file extensions.

10.7 Displaying Swept Noise Data

Previously measured noise data can be readfrom a file and displayed. Select <View>,<Noise>, and either <Swept Frequency> or<Swept Bias>. Select and open a file. The<Memory> option will be available only ifdata was previously entered into memory byeither measurement or read from a file. Thedisplay will be identical to those described inSections 10.2.2 and 10.3.2 and can bemanipulated as described in those sections.

10.8 Displaying Noise Calibration Data

The noise calibration data may be recalled anddisplayed for review. Select <View>,<Noise>, <Cal Data> from the Block Diagramview menu. The display format is the same asthe swept noise display and operates in thesame manner (see Section 10.2.2).

Page 125: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 11-1

11DC I-V Curve Measurement

11.1 General

DC characterization of RF/Microwave devicesis often desirable, and the Automatic TunerSystem already has the automatic bias controlcapability to do this. Therefore, no additionalequipment is needed.

A second benefit of using the ATS system forDC characterization is that the devices can beproperly terminated at the RF frequencieswhile the DC test is done. Some devices mayoscillate and/or self-destruct on standard DCtest stations which do not provide RFterminations.

11.2 Measurement Parameters

A DC I-V curve measurement consists ofsweeping the device output voltage, andmeasuring the device output current. This isusually repeated for a range of input biassettings, creating a family of curves. The inputbias parameter may be voltage or current.

An important consideration is the maximumDC dissipation capability of the device. Theactual dissipation is the product of V_out andI_out, and if this is too high, the device may bedamaged or destroyed. Therefore, at input biassettings which allow high output currents, theV_out sweep may need to truncate in order toprotect the device.

11.3 Making the DC I-V Measurement

To start the DC measurements, select<Measure> from the Block Diagram view,then <DC I-V>. This will bring up the DC-IVCurve Measurement dialog.

Enter the start, stop, and step size for the outputvoltage. Also, enter the start, stop and step sizefor the input bias parameter. Finally, enter themaximum safe power dissipation in Watts forthe DUT.

Click <Details> to change the bias mode,input control type (voltage or current), andother bias setup values.

During the DC measurement, if the V-out*I_out product exceeds the maximumdissipation at any point during the outputvoltage sweep, the sweep will stop, and themeasurement will move to the next input biassetting.

☞ NOTE: The Maximum DC dissipation shouldbe conservative, or else use small steps in theoutput voltage sweep. The voltage sweep willnot truncate due to excess dissipation untilone point actually exceeds the specified dissi-pation. This is because it is not possible toknow the limit will be exceeded until the pointis measured.

When the bias ranges are correct, click <OK>to start the measurement.

When prompted, enter a label and filename,or click <Cancel> to skip saving the data.

The measured DC I-V curve data will then bedisplayed. See section 11-4 for details on this.

11.4 DC I-V Curve Display

The DC I-V Curve Display can be accessed inthree ways:

a. by selecting <View> from the blockdiagram view, then <DC I-V Curves>, and<File>. A File name will be selected andread into memory for the display.

b. by selecting <View> from the blockdiagram view, then <DC I-V Curves>, and<Memory>. The current DC data inmemory will then be displayed. ( If there isno DC data in memory, then the <Memory>option will be unavailable.)

c. The display will be entered automaticallyat the end of a measurement.

Page 126: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

11-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

The Interactive DC I-V curve display plots afamily of DC curves on a rectangular chart, asshown in figure 11-1. The independent(horizontal) axis is output voltage (V_out), andthe dependent (vertical) axis is output current(I_out). The parameter which selects theindividual curve is the input bias value.

Use the arrow keys to move left, right, up, ordown between the various measured points,or point the mouse at a desired point and clickthe left button.

To change the vertical scale, move the mousepointer to highlight the start or stop value, andclick the left button. Then at the prompt, entera new value. (The horizontal scale is set by themeasured V_out range).

11.5 Saving Measured DC Data Files

At the end of each DC I-V curve measurement,a prompt to label the data will appear. If nolabel has been assigned to DC data in the

session, the entry line will be blank. Enter alabel and click <OK>, or click <Don’tChange> to accept the current label ( or tobypass this step if the entry line is blank. Thenext prompt will ask for a file name to save thedata. Enter a file name and click <Save>, orclick <Cancel> if the data is not to be savedyet. The data may also be saved later byselecting <File>, <Save As> from the DC I-Vcurve display.

The program will assign the extension to thedata file. The extension can be changed;however, it is not recommended as it may bedifficult to locate the file at a later time.

11.6 Recalling Measured DC Data Files

Previously measured DC Data can be readfrom a f i le into memory by select ing<View> <DC I-V Curves> and <File> fromthe block diagram view. This brings up thebrowser to select the desired file.

Figure 11-1. DC I-V Curve Display

Page 127: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 12-1

12Enhanced Graphics

12.1 Introduction

The Enhanced Graphics option, modelMT993NO7, provides:

a. Surfer, a third party graphics softwarepackage,

b. An interface to format swept data and loadit into the Surfer program for display on arectangular graph, and

c. An interface to format contour data andload it into the Surfer program for displayof 2-dimensional or 3-dimensionalcontours.

This allows users to customize their graphicaldisplays.

Access to this enhanced graphical display isfrom the <View> menu of either the swept plotview or the contour view. This produces aseamless and simple interface, with no issuesrelated to file formats or data selection.

Figure 12-1 Surfer Rectangular Display Dialog

12.2 Surfer Rectangular Graphical Display

To use the Surfer Rectangular display, select<View><View Surfer> from the swept displayto bring up the dialog shown in Figure 12-1.

Up to five parameters may be selected byclicking on the <Select Parameters> button.The scales for all selected parameters maythen be entered manually or auto-selected.The location of the scale for each parametermay also be selected to be either on the left orthe right side of the graph.

The scale for the independent axis may also beentered manually or auto-selected.

When the parameters are selected and thescales specified, click <View Graphic> tobring up the display in Figure 12-2. This willbe in the Surfer program, and may bemanipulated with the full power of thatsoftware.

Refer to the software manual for the Surferprogram for instructions on manipulating thedisplay.

Page 128: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

12-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

12.3 Surfer Contour Graphical Display

To use the Surfer contour display, select<View><View Surfer> from the contour display tobring up the dialog shown in Figure 12-3.

Select either the 2D or 3D display. If the 2D displayis choosen, then up to three parameters may beselected by clicking on the <Select Parameter>button. If the 3D display is selected, then only oneparameter may be selected.

Click on the <Options> button to select the chart type,line colors and thickness, scales, and other options, asshown in Figure 12-4. The other options are:

Reflection Format:Mag/Phase is reflection Coefficient, Ohmsis impedance.

Show impedance points:Check to include the measured impedancepoints with the contours.

Figure 12-3 Surfer Contour Dialog

Figure 12-2 Surfer Rectangular Display

Page 129: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 12-3

Figure 12-4 Surfer Contour Options Dialog

Z0:The reference impedance at the center ofthe Smith chart.

Show the opposite impedance:Check to display the source impedancewith load pull data, and vice versa.

Graphic Header:This will be a title in the display.

When the parameters are selected and theoptions specified, click on <View Graphic>to bring up the 2D contour display in Figure12-5 or the 3D contour display in Figure12-6. This will be in the Surfer program,and may be manipulated with the full powerof the software.

Page 130: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

12-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

Figure 12-5 Surfer 2D Contour Display

Figure 12-6 Surfer 3D Contour Display

Page 131: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 13-1

13Software Feedback

Software development at Maury Microwave is anongoing process and we are very interested in feedbackfrom our users. As we make improvements and releasenew versions, our intent is to make the system workbetter in your applications.

As you use your software, please write down anycomments or suggestions about software changeswhich could solve your problems or make your jobeasier. User feedback has high priority and influenceas we consider what improvements to make.

For your convenience, you can use copies of theSoftware Feedback Form, Table 13-1, to record yourcomments. Please address them to:

Software Support ManagerMaury Microwave Corporation2900 Inland Empire Blvd.Ontario, CA 91764USA

Fax Number: (909) 987-1112E-mail: ats@maury mw.com

Page 132: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

13-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

This page left blank

Page 133: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual 13-3

Date:Please use this form to provide your comments concerning your present Maury ATS and inputs for future releases.

Direct your input to: Maury Microwave Corporation Attention - Software Support Manager

2900 Inland Empire Blvd. Ontario, CA 91764 Fax : (909) 987-1112 E-mail: [email protected]

Name/Company: Phone/Fax/E-mail: Key No:

Present ATS Application

Table 13-1. Software Feedback

Software Feedback Form

Support Equipment:Please provide Model No. & driverused for current support equipmentor equipment for which support isdesired.

Network Analyzers:

RF Sources:

Noise Instruments:

Power Meters:

Power Supplies:

Computer (type, memory,graphics card, GPIB board,etc.):

Other:

Software: Model No: Rev No. Software Date:

Comments/Inputs: .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................For Engineering Use................................................................................................Log#.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Page 134: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 135: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A1-1

Running the SNPW Program in Demo Mode

A1.1 General

This appendix will describe a step by stepprocedure to run the SNPW program indemonstration mode, making use of the samplefiles which are included. This will help a newuser to quickly learn how to use the software,and to see the various measurement sequencesand modes. This understanding will later helpin setting up the system for doing actual measure-ments.

The demo mode uses a built-in system model togenerate simulated data, which is generallygood enough to give a feel for the programoperation. No real instruments are used, so thiscan be done as soon as the software is installedon the computer. This appendix assumes thatthe SNPW program is already installed on thehard disk.

The conventions used in this appendix are asfollows:

a. Items enclosed by angle brackets indicateeither a key on the keyboard or a menu item.<ESC> is an example of a key, and<Calibrate> is an example of a menu item.

b. "Press" means to type the indicated key.c. "Enter" means to type in the indicated

response, and then press <ENTER>.d. "Select" refers to selecting a menu item. In

most menus, do this by pressing the leftmouse button. In graphical screens, pointthe mouse to highlight the menu item, andthen double click the left mouse button.

A1.2 Program Startup

To start the program:

Start -> Programs -> Maury AutomatedMeasurements -> SNPW

Appendix 1

After the SNPW program starts, look at thecaption, and make sure that the filenameDemo.cfg is in the brackets. This is aconfiguration file which sets the demo modeand sets up the various demo files as the defaults.The Block Diagram view menu will then appear,and you are ready to begin.

To open the right configuration file, select<File><Open>, and then browse for the fileDemo.cfg.

At this point, the power block diagram will bedisplayed. To switch to the noise or s-parameterblock diagram, select the desired choice fromthe top of the <Setup> menu.

A1.3 Calibration

The first step is to calibrate the system, so select<Calibrate> to pull down the Calibration menu.

A1.3.1 Noise Calibration

To calibrate for noise, follow this procedure:

a. Select <Calibrate><Noise> from the BlockDiagram view menu.

b. Select <New Cal> to start a new calibration.c. Press <OK> to accept the default conditions.d. When prompted to connect the thru in demo

mode, simply press <OK>.e. When the calibration is complete, you will

be prompted to enter a label. Either type ina label and click <OK>, or click <Don'tChange> to leave it as it is (even if its blank).

f. Next, you will be prompted for a file nameto save the calibration. That isn't importantin the demo mode, so press <Cancel> toavoid saving the cal file.

g. The system then goes into display mode.Press <ESC> to exit the display mode andreturn to the Block Diagram view.

Page 136: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A1-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

A1.3.2 Power Calibration

To calibrate for power, follow this procedure:

a. Select <Calibrate><Power> from the BlockDiagram view menu.

b. Select <New Cal> to start a new calibration.c. Press <OK> to accept the default conditions.d. When prompted to connect the thru in

demo mode, simply press <OK>.e. When prompted to connect the output sensor

to the power reference, press <SKIP> to skipthe sensor calibration. It isn’t needed in thedemo mode.

f. If prompted to initialize the tuners, simplypress <NO> to skip the re-initialization.

g. When the calibration is complete, you willbe prompted to enter a label. Either type ina label and click <OK>, or click <Don'tChange> to leave it as it is (even if its blank).

h. Next, you will be prompted for a file nameto save the calibration. That isn't importantin the demo mode, so press <Cancel> toavoid saving the cal file.

i. The system then goes into display mode.Press <ESC> to exit the display mode.

A1.3.3 Intermod Calibration

To calibrate for intermod, follow this procedure:

The Intermod calibration sequence is identicalto power calibration. The difference is that withreal measurements, an Intermod calibrationwill be done with two RF sources turned on,while the power calibration is done with onlyone RF source.

To do an Intermod calibration in demo mode,follow the instructions in Section A1.3.2,except start by selecting <Calibrate> <Inter-mod> from the Block Diagram view.

A1.3.4 ACP Calibration

The ACP calibration sequence is identical topower calibration. The difference is that withreal measurements, an ACP calibration will be

done with the selected modulation turned on,while the power calibration is done with NOmodulation.

To do an ACP calibration in demo mode,follow the instructions in section A1.3.2,except start by selecting <Calibrate><ACP>from the Block Diagram View menu.

A1.4 Measurement

Select <Measure> from the Block Diagramview menu to pull down the Measurementmenu.

A1.4.1 Swept Frequency NoiseMeasurements

To do a swept frequency noise measurement,do a noise calibration, then follow thisprocedure:

a. Select <Measure><Noise> from the BlockDiagram view menu.

b. Select <Sweep Freq> from the NoiseMeasurement menu.

c. Press <OK> to accept the default conditions.d. At the prompt for the DUT S-parameter file,

select FETD.S2P.e. The noise measurement will start, with the

data plotted progressively in the rectangularchart at the top of the screen, and tabulatedin the lower window.

f. When the measurement is complete, youwill be prompted to enter a label. Eithertype in a label and click <OK>, or click<Don't Change> to leave it as it is (even if itsblank).

g. Next, at the prompt for a file name to savethe data, press <Cancel> to avoid saving thedata.

h. The Swept Noise Display will then appear.When finished looking at the data, press<ESC> to exit the display mode.

Page 137: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A1-3

A1.4.2 Swept Bias Noise Measurements

To do a swept bias noise measurement, do anoise calibration, then follow this procedure:

a. Select <Measure><Noise> from the BlockDiagram view menu.

b. Select <Sweep Bias> from the NoiseMeasurement menu.

c. Choose a frequency in GHz from theavailable calibrated frequencies and enterbias values.

d. At the prompt for the device S-parameter vs. bias file select FETD.S2B.

e. The noise measurement vs. bias will start,with the data plotted progressively in therectangular chart at the top of the screen,and tabulated in the lower window.

f. When the measurement is complete, youwill be prompted to enter a label. Eithertype in a label and click <OK>, or click<Don't Change> to leave it as it is (even ifits blank).

g. Next, at the prompt for a file name to savethe data, press <Cancel> to avoid savingthe data.

h. The Swept Noise Display will then appear.When finished looking at the data, press<ESC> to exit the display mode.

☞ NOTE: The demo device model does notinclude any noise parameter dependence onbias. Therefore, the swept bias data will beflat.

A1.4.3 Interactive Noise Measurement

To do an interactive noise measurement at onefrequency, do a noise calibration, then followthis procedure:

a. Select <Measure><Noise> from the SNPWmenu.

b. Select <Interactive> from the NoiseMeasurement menu.

c. Choose a frequency from the list, and keepthe default bias values.

d. Press <Read S-Parameter File> and thenselect FETD.S2P. Press <OK> to exit thes-parameter display, and return to the mainstartup dialog. Then press <OK> to bring upthe measurement control screen.

e. In the Noise Interactive MeasurementControl screen, select <Setup><Auto Select>to select points with the automatic algorithm.

f. Then select <Measure><Measure NoiseParameters> to make a measurement. Thenoise parameter solution will be displayednear the bottom of the screen.

g. The Noise Interactive Measurement Controlprovides a lot of interactive control. SeeSection 10 for more details.

A1.4.4 Power Measurement

To do a power measurement, do a powercalibration, then follow this procedure:

a. Select <Measure><Power> from the BlockDiagram view menu.

b. Choose a frequency from the list, and keepthe default bias values.

c. Click <OK> to bring up the power measure-ment control screen.

d. From the Power Measurement Screen, usethe menu to select measurement parameters,change frequency, set input power, or setthe system to local mode. Left click on aSmith chart to toggle individual points.Right click on a Smith chart to get a popupmenu to select blocks of points to be usedduring measurement, zoom in on a portionof the Smith chart, or to set the source andload measurement cursor position.

Eight types of measurements can be made: asingle power measurement, a swept powermeasurement, a bias sweep, a load pull, asource pull, a VSWR circle, an optimum search,or a sweep plan.

When a measurement is done, you will beprompted to enter a label and then a file namefor most of the measurement types. In that case,enter a label, but click <Cancel> to skip saving

Page 138: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A1-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

the data. The interactive data display willappear. If all of the setup parameters (includingbias) are turned on, up to 49 data items may bedisplayed (not all at once). After a single powermeasurement, the scroll bar is used to scroll thedata display (Up/Down).

When finished looking at the display, press<ESC> to exit the display. This will bring up thePower Measurement Screen again.

A1.4.5 Harmonic Tuning Measurement

Power measurement at harmonic frequenciesrequires multiple tuners to control eachharmonic load impedance. To do harmonicpower measurements, follow this procedure:

a. Select <Setup><Instruments> from theBlock Diagram view menu.

b. Click <Controller 3>.c. Select <Model Number:>, to view the

available tuner controllers.d. Select <MT986B02> and click <OK>.e. Complete the power calibration procedure

in Section A1.3.2.f. Select <Power> from the <Measure> menu.g. Choose a frequency from the list.h. Click <OK> to bring up the power

measurement control screen.i. From the Power Measurement Screen menu,

select <View><Tuners>. Select <Source2Tuner> and <Load2 Tuner> to view theharmonic load impedances.

j. From the Power measurement screen, makethe power measurements in the same wayas described in section A1.4.4. If a load orsource pull is selected, a dialog will comeup to select which tuner (fundamental orharmonic) will be pulled. The same displayswill be used.

☞ NOTE: The demo device model does notinclude any harmonic data. Therefore, no loadpull contours will be generated.

A1.4.6 Intermod Measurement

The Intermod measurement is identical to thepower measurement, except that the Intermod

parameters are added, and all data is taken withthe two RF tones turned on.

To do an Intermod measurement in demo mode,follow the instructions in Section A1.4.4, exceptstart by selecting <Measure><Intermod> fromthe Block Diagram view menu.

A1.4.7 ACP Measurement

The ACP measurement is identical to the powermeasurement, except that the ACP parametersare added, and all data is taken with the selectedmodulation turned on.

To do an ACP measurement in demo mode,follow the instructions in Section A1.4.4, exceptstart by selecting <Measure><ACP> from theBlock Diagram view menu.

A1.4.8 DC I-V Curve Measurement

To do an DC I-V curve measurement, followthis procedure:

a. Select <Measure><DC I-V> from theSNPW menu.

b. Press <OK> to accept the default range ofbias values.

c. The DC measurements will begin, and thefamily of curves will be progressively plotted.

d. When the measurement is complete, youwill be prompted to enter a label. Eithertype in a label and click <OK>, or click<Don't Change> to leave it as it is (even if itsblank).

e. Next, at the prompt for a file name to savethe data, press <Cancel> to avoid saving thedata.

f. The DC I-V Curve Display will then comeup. Use the up/down/right/left arrow keysto move the marker, or move the mousepointer to a desired marker position andclick the left mouse button.

A1.5 Display

Previously measured data can be displayed atany time from the display menu. From the Block

Page 139: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A1-5

Diagram menu, select <View>. Then select<S-Parameters>, <Noise>, <Power>, or <DCI-V Curves>.

After the type of data display is selected comesa choice of <Memory> or <File>. <Memory>will display data already in memory, but is onlyavailable if a measurement was previously doneor a file was previously read in. <File> willprompt for a file name to read into memorybefore displaying it.

The displays are the same routines which areused at the end of a measurement. The sampledata files which are provided are all namedFETD with an appropriate file extension for thetype of file (FETD.S2P is a 2-port s-parameterfile, for example).

A1.6 Changing the Setup

After you have gone thru the program using thefactory default setup, and understand thecalibration and measurement sequence, select<Setup> from the Block Diagram view menu.The Setup menu provides a variety of dialogboxes to modify the system options and defaults.Refer to Section 4.0 for setup information.

Page 140: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 141: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-1

Instrument Drivers Supplied

A2.1 General

The main SNPW program is designed to beindependent of specific instruments. All controland data transfer from programmableinstruments is done using software modulescalled instrument drivers. Different instrumentswithin one category (such as the RF sourcecategory) can be selected by specifying adifferent driver. This selection is done from theSetup Instruments Editor (See Section 4.2).

The driver filenames must follow the Windowsconventions to specify the complete path andfile name. The supplied executable drivers arenormally all installed into the \ATS\DRIVERSdirectory and all except the bias instruments(See Section A2.10) have .EXE as the fileextension. Since the \ATS directory is alwayscurrent while the program is running, theDRIVERS subdirectory and the driver file namewithout the extension is normally all that isneeded to specify the driver file name.

The SNPW program uses nine categories ofinstruments. The sections which followdescribe the supplied drivers for each of thosecategories. Each section begins with generalcomments about the instrument category,followed by setup information for eachsupported instrument within the category. Thedefault GPIB address is given as a suggestion,but may be changed to accommodate systemrequirements.

A2.2 GPIB Board

The GPIB board provides communication to allof the instruments.

● Instrument Model: National InstrumentsPCII board

Specified Model: PCIIDriver: drivers\gpibwDefault GPIB address: 0Timeout: 10 seconds

Appendix 2

● Instrument Model: National InstrumentsPCI-GPIB

Specified Model: PCI-GPIBDriver: driver\gpibwDefault GPIB address: 0Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: National InstrumentsAT-GPIB/TNT

Specified Model: AT-GPIB/TNTDriver: drivers\gpibwDefault GPIB address: 0Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: National InstrumentsPCMCIA GPIB card

Specified Model: PCMCIADriver: drivers\gpibwDefault GPIB address: 0Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: National InstrumentsPCMCIA GPIB card

Specified Model: PCMCIA-VER2Driver: drivers\gpibwDefault GPIB address: 0Timeout: 10 seconds

A2.3 GPIB Board/Card Part Numbers (National Instruments)

PCI-GPIB (Plug and Play) 32-bit GPIB cardfor Windows 2000/XP #778032-01. ForWindows® 98, use #777158-01

PCMCIA-GPIB card , #777156-02 fo rWindows® 98 or #778034-02 for Windows2000/XP.

A2.4 Tuner Controller

The tuner controller provides the programmableinterface to the Maury tuners.

Page 142: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986A01Specified Model: MT986A01Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986A02Specified Model: MT986A02Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B01Specified Model: MT986B01Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B02Specified Model: MT986B02Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B21Specified Model: MT986B21Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B22Specified Model: MT986B22Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B24Specified Model: MT986B24Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT986B26Specified Model: MT986B26Driver: drivers\tun986Default GPIB address: 11Timeout: 10 seconds

A2.5 Vector Network Analyzer

The network analyzer is used for tuner character-ization, reflection coefficient measurement ofthe noise source and power sensor, and 2-ports-parameter measurement of the THRU, DUT,and possibly fixture halves.

Once the required s-parameters are measuredand saved in files, the network analyzer is notneeded for either noise or power measurements.

☞ NOTE: The timeout required for the networkanalyzer depends on the sweep time. If manyfrequencies and averages are used, the timeoutmay need to be increased.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz ZVxSpecified Model: RS_ZVRDriver: drivers\vna_ZuxDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

✼● Instrument Model: Agilent E8356ASpecified Model: E8356ADriver: drivers\vna835xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E8357ASpecified Model: E8357ADriver: drivers\vna835xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E8358ASpecified Model: E8358ADriver: drivers\vna835xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E8364ASpecified Model: E8364ADriver: drivers\vna835xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

Page 143: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-3

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8510ASpecified Model: HP8510ADriver: drivers\vna8510Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8510BSpecified Model: HP8510BDriver: drivers\vna8510Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8510CSpecified Model: HP8510CDriver: drivers\vna8510Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8719Specified Model: HP8719Driver: drivers\vna8720Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8720CSpecified Model: HP8720CDriver: drivers\vna8720Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8720DSpecified Model: HP8720DDriver: drivers\vna8720DDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8720ESpecified Model: HP8720EDriver: drivers\vna8720EDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8722DSpecified Model: HP8722DDriver: drivers\vna8720DDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8753CSpecified Model: HP8753CDriver: drivers\vna8753Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: The HP8753C must have firmware re-vision 4.12 or later.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8753DSpecified Model: HP8753DDriver: drivers\vna8753DDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8753ESpecified Model: HP8753EDriver: drivers\vna8753EDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 360Specified Model: W360Driver: drivers\vna360Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS4622BSpecified Model: MS4672BDriver: driver\vna462xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS4623BSpecified Model: MS4623BDriver: drivers\vna462xx.exeDefault GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 37200 SeriesSpecified Model: W37200Driver: drivers\vna37200Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

Page 144: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 37300 SeriesSpecified Model: W37300Driver: drivers\vna37200Default GPIB address: 16Timeout: 30 seconds

A2.6 Noise Figure Meter

The noise figure meter makes the measurementsfrom which the device noise parameters aredetermined. It is used for the power measurementapplications.

● Instrument Model: Maury MT2075B orMT2075B05

Specified Model: MT2075BDriver: drivers\nfm2075Default GPIB address: 8Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Maury MT2075C orMT2075C05 orMT2075C06

Specified Model: MT2075CDriver: drivers\nfm2075Default GPIB address: 8Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Eaton 2075BSpecified Model: MT2075BDriver: drivers\nfm2075Default GPIB address: 8Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: Firmware Revision 3.0 is required.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8970ASpecified Model: HP8970ADriver: driver\nfm8970Default GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This routine is reported to work with anHP8970A. However, it is not tested or guaran-teed by Maury Microwave. Also, it is known thatnot all HP870As respond the same, especially intiming. This driver may need modification towork with a specific HP8970A.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8970BSpecified Model: HP8970BDriver: driver\nfm8970Default GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The HP8970 driver includes control ofthe HP8971B/C test set. See Section A2.7

● Instrument Model: Agilent NFA8973ASpecified Model: N8973ADriver: drivers\nfm897x.exeDefault GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent NFA8974ASpecified Model: N8974ADriver: drivers\nfm897x.exeDefault GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent NFA8975ASpecified Model: N8975ADriver: drivers\nfm897x.exeDefault GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

A2.7 Noise Test Set

The Agilent noise test sets (8971B & 8971C)can only be used with the HP8970B noisefigure meter, and must be connected to the SIBconnector. If a test set is connected, it will bedetected automatically. Also, if a test set isused, the local oscillator source must also beconnected to the HP8970B SIB to allow finetuning of the test set to be done. TheN8975AK40 test set may only be used with theN8975A noise figure analyzer.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8971BSpecified Model: HP8971BDriver: noneDefault GPIB address: 9Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 145: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-5

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8971CSpecified Model: HP8971CDriver: noneDefault GPIB address: 9Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent N8975AK40Specified Model: N8975AK40Driver: drivers\nfm897x.exeDefault GPIB address: 8Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This test set does not require an externalL. O.

A2.8 RF Source (for Local Oscillator orPower Source)

An RF source i s requi red for powercharacterization of amplifiers, and for noisecharacterization if down conversion isrequired external of the noise figure meter.

Even if the same source is used for bothmeasurements in one setup, they must bespecified separately.

☞ NOTE: Some sources turn power on whenpreset. If possible, set source plug-in, etc. so thepreset leaves RF power off. If the preset for aparticular source can not be set for a power offpreset, choose a different source for high powersystem. Also, a low phase noise type must beused as an L. O.

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MG3633ASpecified Model: A3633Driver: drivers\src3633Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MG3660ASpecified Model: A3660ADriver: drivers\src3660Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MG3670BSpecified Model: A3670BDriver: drivers\src3670Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MG3671ASpecified Model: A3671ADriver: drivers\src3670Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Fluke 6060BSpecified Model: F6060BDriver: drivers\src6060Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Fluke 6062ASpecified Model: F6062ADriver: drivers\src6060Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 1026Specified Model: G1026Driver: drivers\src1026Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics12000A Series

Specified Model: G12508A/708ADriver: drivers\src12000.exeDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics12000A Series

Specified Model: G12528A/728ADriver: drivers\src12000.exeDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics12000A Series

Specified Model: G12520A/720ADriver: drivers\src12000.exeDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 146: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics12000A Series

Specified Model: G12522A/722ADriver: drivers\src12000.exeDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics GT9000Specified Model: GT9000Driver: drivers\src8340Default GPIB address: 17Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Must be set to emulate 8340.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8340ASpecified Model: HP8340ADriver: drivers\src8340 or

drivers\src8340rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: src8340r ramps the power level up ordown instead of setting it suddenly. This isslower, but can prevent power surges in somesystems using a TWT amplifier.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8340BSpecified Model: HP8340BDriver: drivers\src8340 or

drivers\src8340rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: src8340r ramps the power level up ordown instead of setting it suddenly. This isslower, but can prevent power surges in somesystems using a TWT amplifier.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8341BSpecified Model: HP8341BDriver: drivers\src8340 or

drivers\src8340rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: src8340r ramps the power level up ordown instead of setting it suddenly. This isslower, but can prevent power surges in somesystems using a TWT amplifier.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8340,60 Seriesand Gigatronics 9000

Specified Model: HP8340Driver: drivers\src8340_atten.Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The driver requires a step attenuatorcontrolled by an HP11713. The HP11713 shouldbe specified in User Instrument 1.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8340, 60 Seriesand GigatronicsGT9000

Specified Model: HP8340 or anotherin series

Driver: drivers\src8340_wtripler.c

Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The driver will only work when con-nected to external tripler.

● Instrument Model: Agilent8350 Series

Specified Model: HP8350A or HP8350BDriver: drivers\src8350 or

drivers\src8350rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver has been tested using anHP8350A with an HP83592A plug-in.Thesrc8350r ramps the power level up instead ofsetting it suddenly. This is slower, but canprevent power surges in some systems using aTWT amplifier.

● Instrument Model: Agilent8360 Series

Specified Model: HP8360Driver: drivers\src8340 or

drivers\src8340rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 147: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-7

☞ NOTE: src8340r ramps the power level up ordown instead of setting it suddenly. This isslower, but can prevent power surges in somesystems using a TWT amplifier.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8642ASpecified Model: HP8642ADriver: drivers\src8642Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8642BSpecified Model: HP8642BDriver: drivers\src8642Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8644BSpecified Model: HP8644BDriver: drivers\src8644Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8648CSpecified Model: HP8648CDriver: drivers\src8648Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8657ASpecified Model: HP8657ADriver: drivers\src8657Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8657BSpecified Model: HP8657BDriver: drivers\src8657Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8664ASpecified Model: HP8664ADriver: drivers\src866XDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8665ASpecified Model: HP8665ADriver: drivers\src866XDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8665BSpecified Model: HP8665BDriver: drivers\src866XDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8672ASpecified Model: HP8672ADriver: drivers\src8672Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8673GSpecified Model: HP8673GDriver: drivers\src8673Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 83711Specified Model: HP83711Driver: drivers\src83700Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 83712Specified Model: HP83712Driver: drivers\src83700Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 83731Specified Model: HP83731Driver: drivers\src83700Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 83732Specified Model: HP83731Driver: drivers\src83700Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 148: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Agilent 83752Specified Model: HP83752Driver: drovers\src83752Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 89441ASpecified Model: HP89441ADriver: drivers\src89441Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver requires a radio test personalitycard.

☞ NOTE: Does not currently support CDMA.

● Instrument Model: Agilent PSG SeriesSpecified Model: G8241ADriver: drivers\srce82xxaDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent PSG SeriesSpecified Model: E8244ADriver: drivers\ srce82xxaDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent PSG SeriesSpecified Model: E8251ADriver: drivers\srce82xxaDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent PSG SeriesSpecified Model: E8254ADriver: drivers\srce82xxaDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent ESG-4000ASpecified Model: HP_ESGDriver: drivers\srcesgaDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver requires a radio test person-ality card. Does not currently support CDMA.

● Instrument Model: Agilent ESG-4000DSpecified Model: HP_ESGDriver: drivers\srcesgdDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent MCSSSpecified Model: HP_MCSSDriver: drivers\srcmcssDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver modifies the MCSS control (.ini)file.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 2024Specified Model: M2024Driver: drivers\src2024Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Marconi 2050Specified Model: M2050Driver: drivers\src2050Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This source is capable of digital modulation.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6200 test setSpecified Model: M6200Driver: drivers\src6200SDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Driver src 6200S puts the Marconi TestSet in source only mode. This driver will notwork in conjunction with pm6200.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6203 test setSpecified Model: M6203Driver: drivers/src6203SDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Driver src 6203S puts the Marconi TestSet in source only mode. This driver will notwork in conjunction with pm6203.

Page 149: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-9

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6203 test setSpecified Model: M6203Driver: drivers\src6203TDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Driver src6203T puts the Marconi TestSet in test set mode and allows the test set to beused both as a source and dual power measure-ment system. Use this mode in conjunction withpm6203.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz SMESpecified Model: RS_SMEDriver: drivers\src_smeDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This source is capable of digital modulation.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & SchwarzSMHU

Specified Model: RS_SMHUDriver: drivers\src_smhuDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This source is capable of digital modulation.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz SMIQSpecified Model: RS_SMIQDriver: drivers\src_smiqDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This source is capable of digital modulation.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz SMSSpecified Model: RS_SMSDriver: drivers\src_smsDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz SMTSpecified Model: RS_SMTDriver: drivers\src_smtDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Wavetek 2520Specified Model: WT2520Driver: drivers\src2520Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Wavetek 2520ASpecified Model: WT2520ADriver: drivers\src2520Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 6600B Seriessweepers

Specified Model: W6600BDriver: drivers\src6600Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 6600B Seriessweepers

Specified Model: W6600BDriver: drivers\src6600rDefault GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver is a special ramping driver.All level requests greater than -4 dBm are startedfrom -5 dBm and increments in 1 dB steps to therequested level (the final step may be lessthan 1 dB).

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 6700 Seriessynthesizers

Specified Model: W6700Driver: drivers\src6700Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 68000A Seriessynthesizers

Specified Model: W68XXADriver: drivers\src68_69Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 150: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-10 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Anritsu 69000A Seriessynthesizers

Specified Model: W69XXXADriver: drivers\src68_69Default GPIB address: 19Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Any manuallycontrolled source

Specified Model: MANUALDriver: drivers\src_manDefault GPIB address: not usedTimeout: not used

☞ NOTE: With this selection, the user will beprompted to set the source frequency and set thepower levels. The GPIB address and timeout arenot used.

A2.9 Power Meter (for Output, Input orReflection)

An output power meter is required for powermeasurements, and an input power meter orreflection power meter are optional. An inputpower meter may be used to correct for RF sourcedrift. If the reflection power meter is used, thepower delivered to the DUT can be measured.If two separate instruments are used for twopower meters, they must have different GPIBaddresses. If a dual power meter is used, themodel number is specified differently for eachchannel, but the GPIB address will be the samefor both.

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2407ASpecified Model: A2407Driver: drivers\fm2407Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2408ASpecified Model: A2408CHADriver: drivers\pm2408Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2408ASpecified Model: A2408CHBDriver: drivers\pm2408Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2437ASpecified Model: A2437CHADriver: drivers\pm2437ADefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2437ASpecified Model: A2437CHBDriver: drivers\pm2437ADefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2438ASpecified Model: A2438CHADriver: drivers\pm2438Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu ML2438ASpecified Model: A2438CHBDriver: drivers\pm2438Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Boonton 4220Specified Model: B4220Driver: drivers\pm4220Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Boonton 4230 usingchannel 1

Specified Model: B4230CH1Driver: drivers\pm4230Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Boonton 4230using channel 2

Specified Model: B4230CH2Driver: drivers\pm4230Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8502 using8542C channel A

Specified Model: G8502CHADriver: drivers\pm8502Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

Page 151: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-11

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8502using channel B

Specified Model: G8502CHBDriver: drivers\pm8502Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8541Busing channel A

Specified Model: G8541CHADriver: drivers\pm8541Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8541Busing channel B

Specified Model: G8541CHBDriver: drivers\pm8541Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8542using channel A

Specified Model: G8542CHADriver: drivers\pm8542Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8542using channel B

Specified Model: G8542CHBDriver: drivers\pm8542Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8542Cusing channel A

Specified Model: G8542CHADriver: drivers\pm8542CODefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the standardpm8542 driver. This special power meter driveradjusts its displayed power using the valuesspecified for loss in the power sensor file. Useonly for output power display.

● Instrument Model: Gigatronics 8542Cusing channel B

Specified Model: G8542CHBDriver: drivers\pm8542CODefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the standardpm8542 driver. This special power meter driveradjusts its displayed power using the valuesspecified for loss in the power sensor file. Useonly for output power display.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 436ASpecified Model: HP436Driver: drivers\pm436Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 437BSpecified Model: HP437BDriver: drivers\pm437Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 437Busing high sensitivitysensor

Specified Model: HP437BDriver: drivers\pm437_hsDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver was verified with anHP8481D high sensitivity sensor. This drivercould significantly speed up measurements whenused to measure reflected power.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438ASpecified Model: HP438CHADriver: drivers\pm438Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438ASpecified Model: HP438CHBDriver: drivers\pm438Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 152: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-12 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438Ausing high sensitivitysensor on channel A

Specified Model: HP438CHADriver: drivers\pm438_hsDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the stan-dard pm438 driver. Channel A was modifiedfor use of a high sensitivity sensor only. Thedriver was verified using an HP8481D sensoron Channel A. This driver could significantlyspeed up measurements when channel A isused to measure reflected power.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438Ausing high sensitivitysensor on channel B

Specified Model: HP438CHBDriver: drivers\pm438_hsDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 second

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438Ausing high power sensoron channel A

Specified Model: HP438CHADriver: drivers\pm438_hpDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of thestandard pm438 driver. This driver was modi-fied for use of a high power sensor only. Thedriver was verified using an HP8484A sensor.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438ASpecified Model: HP438CHBDriver: drivers\pm438_hpDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the stan-dard pm438 driver. This driver was modified foruse of a high power sensor only. The driver wasverified using an HP8484A sensor.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438Ausing channel A

Specified Model: HP438CHADriver: drivers\pm438osDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the stan-dard pm438 driver. This special power meterdriver adjusts its displayed power using the valuesspecified for loss in the power sensing file. Useonly for output power display.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 438Ausing channel B

Specified Model: HP438CHBDriver: drivers\pm438osDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modified version of the standardpm438 driver. This special power meter driveradjusts its displayed power using the values speci-fied for loss in the power sensing file. Use only foroutput power display.

● Instrument Model: Agilent EPM441ASpecified Model: HP441ADriver: drivers\pm441Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent EPM-442ASpecified Model: HP442CHADriver: drivers\pm442Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent EPM-442ASpecified Model: HP442CHBDriver: drivers\pm442Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4416ASpecified Model: E4416ADriver: drivers\pm4416Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: Use the "TEST" button to view how toset up the available modulation types.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4417ASpecified Model: E4417AchADriver: drivers\pm4417Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

Page 153: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-13

☞ NOTE: Use the "TEST" button to view how toset up the available modulation types.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4417ASpecified Model: E4417AchBDriver: drivers\pm4417Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: Use the "TEST" button to view how toset up the available modulation types.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4418ASpecified Model: HP4418ADriver: drivers\pm4418Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4418ASpecified Model: HP4418ADriver: drivers\pm4418osDefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver will show corrected powerwhen used as output meter.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4419ASpecified Model: HP4419CHADriver: drivers\pm4419Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent E4419ASpecified Model: HP4419CHBDriver: drivers\pm4419Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 5347ASpecified Model: HP5347ADriver: drivers\pm5347ADefault GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6200 test setusing Channel A

Specified Model: M62ADriver: drivers\pm6200Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver requires a diode detectorconnected to channel A.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6200 test setusing channel D

Specified Model: M62DDriver: drivers\pm6200Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30

☞ NOTE: This driver requires a power sensorconnected to channel D.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6203 test setusing channel A

Specified Model: M62ADriver: drivers\pm6203Default GPIB address: See note belowTimeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: The GPIB address must be the same asthat set for src6203T. This driver requires a diodedetector connected to channel A on the test set.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6203 test setusing channel D

Specified Model: M62DDriver: drivers\pm6203Default GPIB address: See note belowTimeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: The GPIB address must be the same asthat set for src6203T. This driver requires apower sensor connected to channel D on the testset.

● Instrument Model: Marconi 6960BSpecified Model: M6960BDriver: drivers\pm6960Default GPIB address: 13Timeout: 30 seconds

Page 154: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-14 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

A2.10 Bias Supply

A bias supply can be as simple as a single biassupply or consist of a complex combination of anumber of different instruments (input and outputsupplies, current and voltage meters). Theprogram uses a single bias driver (drivers\bias.exe)that, in turn, calls the specified drivers from alibrary. The individual driver files for the biassystem all have the file extension .dll.

The dlls are divided into three categories asfollows: power supply, voltmeter, and currentmeter. If a voltmeter or current meter is notspecified, the internal readback for the specifiedpower supplies will be used. Many of the dllssupport several different models of a manufact-urer's series. Also, if the power supply selectedhas multiple outputs, the desired output is selectedby setting the channel number for the particularoutput. If the supply has only a single output, thechannel number is ignored. The user shouldsearch the list of models available and select thedll that includes the desired model. The usershould type in the exact model if it isn't alreadyin the drop down list. Currently, the model'sselected when using the "TEST" button are nottransferred back to the main program.

A2.10.1 Power Supply

● Manufacturer: AdvantestBias Supply Driver: ps_6143.dllModels Available: TR6143

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps3631.dllModels Available: E3631A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps3632.dllModels Available: E3632A, E3633A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps4142.dllModels Available: 4142B_41420,

4142B_41421

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps4156.dllModels Available: HP4156

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps4352.dllModels Available: HP4352B

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps6032.dllModels Available: HP6032A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps6038.dllModels Available: HP6038A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps661x.dllModels Available: HP6611C, HP6612C,

HP6613C, HP6614C

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps662x.dllModels Available: HP6621A, HP6622A,

HP6623A, HP6624A,HP6625A, HP6626A,HP6627A, HP6628A,HP6629A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps663x.dllModels Available: HP6631A, HP6631B,

HP6632A, HP6632B,HP6634A, HP6634B

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps664x.dllModels Available: HP6641A, HP6642A,

HP6643A, HP6644A,HP6645A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps665x.dllModels Available: HP6651A, HP6652A,

HP6653A, HP6654A,HP6655A

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps667x.dllModels Available: HP6671A, HP6672A,

HP6673A, HP6674A,HP6675A

Page 155: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-15

● Manufacturer: AgilentBias Supply Driver: ps668x.dllModels Available: HP6681A, HP6682A,

HP6683A, HP6684A,HP6685A

● Manufacturer: AnyBias Supply Driver: ps_ent.dllModels Available: ENTRY

☞ NOTE: This driver prompts for setting the biasmanually and prompts for manual entry ofreadback.

● Manufacturer: AnyBias Supply Driver: ps_man.dllModels Available: MANUAL

☞ NOTE: This driver prompts for setting the biasmanually and assumes all bias values are same asrequested!

● Manufacturer: KeithlyBias Supply Driver: ps228.dllModels Available: K228A

● Manufacturer: KeithlyBias Supply Driver: ps2304.dllModels Available: K2304A

● Manufacturer: KeithlyBias Supply Driver: ps236.dllModels Available: K236A, K238A

● Manufacturer: SorensenBias Supply Driver: ps_hpd60.dllModels Available: SR-HPD60-5

● Manufacturer: SorensenBias Supply Driver: ps_xt15.dllModels Available: SR-XT-15

A2.10.2 Voltmeter

These instruments may be used to monitor theDUT input and /or output DC voltage.

● Manufacturer: AgilentVoltmeter Driver: vm34401.dllModels Available: HP34401A

● Manufacturer: AgilentVoltmeter Driver: vm3478.dllModels Available: HP3478A

● Manufacturer: John FlukeVoltmeter Driver: vm8840.dllModels Available: Fluke8840A

A2.10.3 Current Meter

These instruments may be used to monitor theDUT input and /or output DC current.

● Manufacturer: AdvantestCurrent Meter Driver: im6846.dllModels Available: TR6846A

● Manufacturer: AgilentCurrent Meter Driver: im34401.dllModels Available: HP34401A

● Manufacturer: AgilentCurrent Meter Driver: im3478.dllModels Available: HP3478A

● Manufacturer: John FlukeCurrent Meter Driver: im45.dllModels Available: Fluke45

● Manufacturer: John FlukeCurrent Meter Driver: im8840.dllModels Available: Fluke8840A

A2.11 Spectrum Analyzer

The spectrum analyzer is used in intermodulationdistortion and ACP measurements. It may also beused to detect oscillations in noise measurements.

☞ NOTE: The timeout required for the spectrumanalyzer depends on the measurement configu-ration. For example, if a very small setting forresolution bandwidth is used, the timeout mayneed to be increased.

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS2602Aspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: A2602ADriver: drivers\sa2602Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 156: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-16 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Agilent 4406ASpecified Model: E4406ADriver: drivers\sa4406Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 4407BSpecified Model: E4407BDriver: drivers\sa4407BDefault GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8560Aspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8560ADriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8560Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8560EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8561Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8561EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8562Aspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8562ADriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8562Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8562EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8563Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8563EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8564Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8564EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8565Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8565EDriver: drivers\sa8560Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8566Bspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8566BDriver: drivers\sa8566Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8568Bspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8568BDriver: drivers\sa8568Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8592Bspectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8592BDriver: drivers\sa8592Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8593Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8593EDriver: drivers\sa8592Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 157: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-17

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8595Espectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP8595EDriver: drivers\sa8595Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 70000spectrum analyzer

Specified Model: HP70000Driver: drivers\sa70000Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This is a modular type instrument. Thedriver requires the following components:HP700001A Main Frame, HP70205A GraphicsDisplay, HP70900A Local Oscillator, HP70902AIF Section, and HP70904A RF Section (100 Hz-2.9 GHz).

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz FSEBSpectrum Analyzer

Specified Model: RS-FSEDriver: drivers\sa_fsebDefault GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Tektronix 2784spectrum analyzer

Specified Model: TEK2784Driver: drivers\sa2784Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver may work for the entireTektronix 2780 series.

● Instrument Model: Tektronix 2794spectrum analyzer

Specified Model: TEK2794Driver: drivers\sa2794Default GPIB address: 15Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver may work for the entireTektronix 2790 series.

A2.12 ACP Analyzer

The ACP analyzer is used for Adjacent ChannelPower measurements.

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS2602Aadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: A2602ADriver: drivers\acp2602Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS2661Aadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: A2661ADriver: drivers\acp2661Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 4406ASpecified Model: HP4406ADriver: drivers\Acp4406Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 30 seconds

● Instrument Model: Anritsu MS8604Aadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: A8604ADriver: drivers\acp8604Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8560series adjacent channelpower analyzer

Specified Model: HP8560 to HP8565Driver: drivers\acp8560Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This version just reads the marker at thecenter of each channel. Run the driver in testmode to see available modulation types.

Page 158: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-18 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8560series adjacent channelpower analyzer

Specified Model: HP8560 to HP8565Driver: drivers\acp8560iDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This version integrates over each chan-nel. Run driver in test mode to see availablemodulation types.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8590adjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: HP8590Driver: drivers\acp8590Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver requires the PDC personalitycard.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8590adjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: HP8509E, HP893E,HP8595E

Driver: drivers\acp8590CDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This version integrates over each chan-nel. Run driver in test mode to see availablemodulation types.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 8595Cadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: HP8595CDriver: drivers\acp8590Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver requires the CDMA person-ality card. This driver has built in delay of 4minutes.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 89441Aadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: HP89441ADriver: drivers\acp89441Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Requires radio personality card.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 89441Aadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: HP89441ADriver: drivers\acp8944XDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 30 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver does not require the radiopersonality, but it hasn't been fully tested.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz FSEBadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: RS-FSEDriver: drivers\acp_fseDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz FSEBadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: RS-FSEDriver: drivers\acp_fse2Default GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver is capable of wide bandCDMA. It can also read a files to adjust cf.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz FSEBadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: RS-FSEDriver: drivers\acp_fse_specDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 159: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-19

☞ NOTE: Run this driver in test mode to seespecial options.

● Instrument Model: Rohde & Schwarz FSIQadjacent channel poweranalyzer

Specified Model: RS-FSIQDriver: drivers\acp_fsiqDefault GPIB address: 1Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The modulation string can be PHS,PPC, NADC, CDMA or WCDMA. Also run thisdriver in test mode to see the available modula-tion modifiers.

A2.13 Old Bias Drivers

Beginning with version 3.00, it is stronglyrecommended to use separate bias driver DLLsfor each power supply, voltmeter or currentmeter. The individual DLLs are used with themain Bias System Driver bias.exe. This allowsany combination of bias instruments to becombined as required. This approach replacesall of the old drivers, where each driver waswritten for a specific combination of biasinstruments.

However, because this is a significant systemchange, the old bias drivers are provided inversion 3.00 to ensure a smooth transition. Oneof these drivers could be used in place of the biassystem driver bias.exe, and the individual driverspecification would be ignored. The old biasdrivers are installed in a sub-directory namedBiasOld.

If a situation does require use of one of the olddrivers in the BiasOld directory, please notifyMaury so that the problem can be corrected. Infuture revisions, the old style bias drivers will beobsolete and no longer supported.

A description of the old bias drivers follows:

● Instrument Model: Agilent E3631Aand 34401A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: E3631AOutput I Meter: HP34401A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias3631Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Output I Meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsOuput I Meter: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Uses an HP34401A to read back outputcurrent.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E3631ASpecified Model:

Bias Supply: E3631ABias Supply Driver: drivers\bias3631iDefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Timeout:

Bias Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver uses the +25V for DUT inputand the 6V supply for DUT output. Uses internalread back for voltage and current.

● Instrument Model: Agilent E3632ASpecified Models:

Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: E3632AOutput Supply: E3632A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias3632Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 4142BSpecified Model: HP4142BDriver: drivers\pm4142Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

Page 160: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-20 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

☞ NOTE: This driver requires an HP41420A SMUto be installed slots 1-2, and connected to theDUT output. An HP41421B SMU must beinstalled in slot 3, and connected to the DUTinput.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 4145ASpecified Model: HP4145ADriver: drivers\bias4145Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect channel 2 to the DUT input,and channel 3 to the DUT output.

● Instrument Models: Agilent 6032ASpecified Model: HP6032ADriver: drivers\bias6032Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver only will set V_out usingspecified current limit. Readback from biassupply.

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6032AInput V Meter: John Fluke 8840AInput I Meter: John Fluke 8840A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: HP6032AInput I Meter: FL8840AInput I Meter: FL8840A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6032VDefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input V Meter: 26Input I Meter: 27

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput V Meter: 10 secondsInput I Meter: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver set V_out using specifiedcurrent limit, then reads back input & outputvalues. The input readings are obtained usingexternal meters, while the output is readbackfrom the bias supply.

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6038AOutput Supply: Agilent 6632A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6638AOutput Supply: HP6632A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6038Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Set HP6653A for SCPI interface. Do notset HP6632A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6612BOutput Supply: Agilent 6612B

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6612BInput Supply: HP6612B

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6612Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Set both supplies for SCPI interface.

Page 161: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-21

● Instrument Models: Advantest TR6143Specified Models:

Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: TR6143Input Supply: TR6143

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6143Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6613COutput Supply: Agilent 6614C

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6613CInput Supply: HP6614C

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6614Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models: Agilent 6621ASpecified Models:

Bias Supply: HP6621ABias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6621Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Timeout:

Bias Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Use outport 1 for DUT input and output2 for DUT output.

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6612BOutput Supply: Agilent 6032A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6612BInput Supply: HP6032A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi32_12Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models: Agilent 34401 metersused to read input andoutput voltage andcurrent. Any manuallyset bias supply may beused. All four (4)meters are optional.

Specified Models:Bias Supply: ManualInput V Meter: HP34401Input I Meter: HP34401Output V Meter: HP34401Output I Meter: HP34401

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\biasbi34401Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input V Meter: 26Input I Meter: 27Output V Meter: 28Output I Meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput V Meter: 10 secondsInput I Meter: 10 secondsOutput V Meter: 10 secondsOutput I Meter: 10 seconds

Page 162: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-22 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Models: Agilent 6032ASpecified Models:

Bias Supply: HP6032ABias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6032Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3

☞ NOTE: This is a single output supply. The driverwill allow the user to specify output voltage andcurrent limits only.

● Instrument Models: Agilent 6612Cand E3632A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6612CInput Supply: E3632A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6612_3632Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Both supplies must be sent to SCPIcommand set.

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6623AInput I Meter: HP34401

(Emulating HP3478)Specified Models:

Bias Supply: HP6623AInput I Meter: HP34401

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6623aDefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input I Meter: 27

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput I Meter: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect supply output 1 to the DUTinput, and supply output 3 to the DUT output.This is a unipolar supply, so if negative bias isneeded, this must be done by the physical con-nection.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6624ASpecified Model: HP6624ADriver: drivers\bias6624Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect supply output 1 to the DUTinput, and supply output 3 to the DUT output.This is a unipolar supply, so if negative bias isneeded, this must be done by the physical con-nection.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6625ASpecified Model: HP6625ADriver: drivers\bias6625Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect supply output 1 to the DUTinput, and supply output 2 to the DUT output.This is a unipolar supply, so if negative bias isneeded, this must be done by the physical con-nection.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6626ASpecified Model: HP6626ADriver: drivers\bias6625Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect supply output 1 to the DUTinput, and supply output 3 to the DUT output.This is a unipolar supply, so if negative bias isneeded, this must be done by the physical con-nection.

Page 163: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-23

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6632AOutput Supply: Agilent 6653A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6632AOutput Supply: HP6653A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6632Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Set HP6653A for SCPI interface. Do notset HP6632A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6634AOutput Supply: Agilent 6653A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6634AOutput Supply: HP6653A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6634Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Set HP6653A for SCPI interface. Do notset HP6634A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6673ASpecified Model: HP6673ADriver: drivers\bias6673Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: This driver will set V_out using specifiedcurrent limit. Set HP6673A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Model: Agilent 3478A used asan output volt meterwith a manually oper-ated bias supply.

Specified Model:Bias Supply: ManualOutput V Meter: HP3478A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias3478Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Output V Meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsOutput V Meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 3478A used asan output current meterwith a manually operatedbias supply.

Specified Model:Bias Supply: ManualOutput I Meter: HP3478A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi3478vcDefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Output I Meter: 28

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsOutput I Meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6626ASpecified Model: HP6626ADriver: drivers\bi14852Default GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Connect supply output 1 to the DUTinput, and supply output 3 to the DUT outputwith HP14852 bias cable.

Page 164: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-24 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6622AInput I meter: Agilent 3478AOutput I meter: Agilent 3478A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: HP6622AInput I meter: HP3478AOutput I meter: HP3478A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6622Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input I meter: 27Output I meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput I meter: 10 secondsOutput I meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6623AInput I meter: Advantest TR6846Output I meter: Advantest TR6846

Specified Models:Bias Supply: HP6623AInput I meter: TR6846Output I meter: TR6846

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6623Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input I meter: 27Output I meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput I meter: 10 secondsOutput I meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6623AInput I meter: Agilent 34401

(Emulating HP3478)Output I meter: Agilent 34401

(Emulating HP3478)Specified Models:

Bias Supply: HP6623AInput I meter: HP34401Output I meter: HP34401

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6623ADefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input I meter: 27Output I meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput I meter: 10 secondsOutput I meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput I meter: Agilent 6634AOutput I meter: Agilent 6653A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput I meter: HP6634AOutput I meter: HP6653A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6634_53Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input I meter: 24Output I meter: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput I meter: 10 secondsOutput I meter: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The HP6653A uses the SCPI commandlanguage.

Page 165: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-25

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6642Output Supply: Agilent 6654A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6642Output Supply: HP6654AInput I Meter: HP34401A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\biasmhc2Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25Input I Meter: 27

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 secondsInput I Meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Sorenson XT-15Output Supply: Sorenson

All four monitors: Agilent HP34401ASpecified Models:

Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: SR-XT-15Output Supply: SR-XT-15Input V Meter: HP34401AOutput V Meter: HP34401AOutput I Meter: HP34401A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\biasxt15Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25Input V Meter: 26Input I Meter: 27Output V Meter: 28Output I Meter: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 secondsInput V Meter: 10 secondsInput I Meter: 10 secondsOutput V Meter: 10 secondsOutput I Meter: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The HP meters are optional. Set themodel if you want to use any or all of the HPmeters to monitor.

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Agilent 6632AOutput Supply: Agilent 6653AInput I meter: Agilent 34401

(Emulating HP3478)Output I meter: Agilent 34401

(Emulating HP3478)Specified Models:

Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6632AOutput Supply: HP6653AInput I meter: HP34401Output I meter: HP34401

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\biasmultDefault GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25Input I meter: 27Output I meter: 29

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 secondsInput I meter: 10 secondsOutput I meter: 10 seconds

● Instrument Model: Agilent 6643ABias Supply: HP6643A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi6643m4Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Timeout:

Bias Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: The driver can only set V_out and theout-current limit. Uses supplies' readback.

Page 166: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A2-26 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6634AOutput Supply: Agilent 6643A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6634AOutput Supply: HP6643A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6643Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Set HP6643A to SCPI interface. Do notset HP6634A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Agilent 6653A

Output Supply: Agilent 6653ASpecified Models:

Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: HP6653AOutput Supply: HP6653A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias6653Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Use SCPI interface for both supplies.

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Keithly 228AOutput Supply: Keithly 228A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: K228AOutput Supply: K228A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bias228Default GPIB addresses:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

● Instrument Models:Bias Supply: Keithly 236AOutput Supply: Agilent 6643A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: K236AOutput Supply: HP6643A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\biask_hpBias Supply: biasInput Supply: ps_inOutput Supply: ps_out

Default GPIB addresses:Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 24Output Supply: 25

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

Page 167: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A2-27

● Instrument Models:Input Supply: Sorenson HPD60-5Output Supply: Agilent 6032A

Specified Models:Bias Supply: MultipleInput Supply: SR-HPD60-5Output Supply: HP60332A

Bias Supply Driver: drivers\bi_hp_srDefault GPIB address:

Bias Supply: 3Input Supply: 26Output Supply: 27

Timeout:Bias Supply: 10 secondsInput V Supply: 10 secondsOutput Supply: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Do not set HP6032A for SCPI interface.

● Instrument Model: Any manuallycontrolled biassupply

Specified Model: MANUALDriver: drivers\bias_manDefault GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: Bias_man assumes all specified settingsare obtailed without further prompt.

● Instrument Model: Any manuallycontrolled biassupply

Specified Model: MANUALDriver: drivers/bias_entDefault GPIB address: 3Timeout: 10 seconds

☞ NOTE: SWith this selection, the user will beprompted to set the bias on and off. The GPIBaddress and timeout are not used.

Page 168: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 169: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A3-1

Programming Custom Instrument Driversand User Functions

A3.1 General

The SNPW program controls and takes data froma variety of instruments. But the main programnever talks to an instrument directly; allcommunication between the SNPW programand the instruments is done through instrumentdrivers. Each driver is a small stand-alonemodule, which is created independently fromthe SNPW program. Each driver has a defined setof subroutines which do the various functionsrequired of the type of instrument it supports.

When the main program begins a measurement,it spawns all of the specified driver modules.Then when it needs to talk to an instrument, ituses the specific driver for that instrument. Thedriver will perform the specified function andpass the data back to the main program, allowingthe SNPW program to continue. When the entiremeasurement is complete, the drivers areremoved from memory.

The user function is a programmable measure-ment driver that operates in the same way as theinstrument drivers. This has a defined set ofsubroutines that are called at various pointsduring the calibration and measurement of bothnoise and power. The purpose is to provide theflexibility for the user to tailor the measurementto meet unique requirements.

A big advantage of this approach is the ease ofprogramming custom drivers. Each module issmall and relatively simple, and can be written,compiled, and tested independent of the mainprogram.

A3.2 Source Code Structure

The existing driver modules are written in the Clanguage using the Microsoft Visual C++ Studio,version 6.0. The source code is provided, socopies of existing drivers may be used astemplates for new or modified drivers. These

Appendix 3

source code modules are installed into the<drivers> subdirectory during the installation ofthe MT993( ) series software.

For each driver type, there are four "main" filesthat must be linked with each individual driver.These four filenames for each driver category arelisted in Table A3-1.

Driver Catagory “main” files to link with

each driver

GPIB board gpibmain.c gpibmain.hgpibmain.rc gpibmain.ico

Bias System biasmain.c biasmain.hbiasmain.rc biasmain.ico

Noise Figure Meter nfmmain.c nfmmain.hnfmmain.rc nfmmain.ico

Power Meter pmmain.c pmmain.hpmmain.rc pmmain.ico

Spectrum Analyzer samain.c samain.hsamain.rc samain.ico

ACP Analyzer acpmain.c acpmain.hacpmain.rc acpmain.ico

RF Source srcmain.c srcmain.hsrcmain.rc srcmain.ico

Frequency Meter fmmain.c fmmain.hfmmain.rc fmmain.ico

RF Switch swmain.c swmain.hswmain.rc swmain.ico

Vector Network vnamain.c vnamain.hAnalyzer vnamain.rc vnamain.ico

User Function usermain.c usermain.husermain.rc usermain.ico

Table A3-1. "Main Files for Each Driver Category"

Page 170: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A3-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

In addition, the following files are linked withevery driver:

decl-32.hgpib-32.objni488.hgpib_ni.cdrv.h

In each individual driver module, the first sectioncontains comments describing the driver, andsome declaration statements. The comments willinclude a list of required routines that should bemodified when making a new driver.

The first subroutine in each driver is calledget_driver_info( ). This routine defines informa-tion about the driver that can be queried. Itincludes a list of model numbers supported bythe driver, a caption for the stand-alone testwindow, a date, and a description string. Somedriver categories also include lists of other items,such as the list of supported modulation stringsfor RF source drivers and ACP analyzer drivers.

The rest of the driver contains the variousfunctions which are defined for the particulardriver category. The required functions whichare called by the SNPW program are listed at thetop in the comments. There may also be someextra routines which are used to support theserequired functions. These extra routines may bedeleted if not needed by the new driver.

Each of the required functions has a headerwhich describes the purpose, parameters, andreturn values. Further detail on the datastructures of the parameters can be seen bylooking in the include file drv.h and the "main".hfile for the particular driver category.

A3.3 Data Structures

The data structures are defined in the include filesdrv.h and nhead.h. These are the same datastructures as used by the main SNPW program, sothat the driver can use and write data to the samememory locations used by the SNPW program.

Data structures in the C language consist ofnamed elements of any combination of data

types, including other structures. This is aconvenient way to lump all related variablestogether to simplify passing data to and fromsubroutines. The main SNPW program typicallypasses a small number of structures to the drivermodules, but this can include a lot of data.

To access an individual variable within a datastructure, specify the full hierarchy from thevariable name of the entire structure down to thespecific variable. For example, the measuredoutput voltage is the “vmeas[bias_out]” part ofthe “bias_type” structure, which is the “bias” partof the “user_setup_type” structure. In the routine“user_function_power( )”, the variable “*setup”is a “user_setup_type”, and the asterisk meansthat it is a pointer. Therefore, to specify themeasured output voltage, specify:

setup->bias.vmeas[bias_out]

Many books are available with more informationon specific syntax of the C language.

An explanation of the elements of some key structuresdefined in drv.h is as follows:

The structure instrument_type contains the followingelements:

address integer GPIB addressbin_address a binary number returned from the

National Instruments IBFIND routinedelay_ms number of mSec to wait after GPIB

initializationfilename string containing the driver file namegpib_name string containing the GPIB namemodel string containing the model numbername string containing instrument nametimeout string containing the timeout value

The structure bias_type contains the following elements:

control integer specifying input control.It will be one of the constantsVOLTAGE_CONTROL orCURRENT_CONTROL

enabled flag indicating if bias is used in theblock diagram

filename string containing the main bias driverfile name

i_in_start start input current in mA for mode 1with current control

Page 171: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A3-3

acp_alt2_low ratio in dB of power in the 2nd loweralternate channel to power in thedesired channel

acp_alt2_up ratio in dB of power in the 2nd upperalternate channel to power in thedesired channel

acp_anal instrument_type structure for ACPanalyzer

acp_phase_err phase error in degrees in thedemodulated signal

acp_pn_length pseudonoise sequence length beforerepetition

acp_setup_type structure with information about theACP analyzer setup

acp_ve_rms RMS vector error in percent in thedemodulated signal

bias bias_type structure with bias datac carrier power in dBm at DUT output

planec_2nd delivered output power in dBm at the

2nd harmonicc_3rd delivered output power in dBm at the

3rd harmoniccal_carr [ ] carriage positions of tuners during

calibrationcal_p1 [ ] probe 1 positions of tuners during

calibrationcal_p2 [ ] probe 2 positions of tuners during

calibrationcal_thru spara_type structure of the thru used

for calibrationcal_tuner [ ] spara_type structure of tuners in

calibration positioncarr [ ] carriage positions of tuners during

measurementcontext structure with information about the

context of the power measurementcontrol_string string with information from setup

menucoupling_in coupling factor of the input coupler

(ratio)coupling_refl coupling factor of the reflection

coupler (ratio)coupling_spectrum coupling factor of the spectrum

analyzer coupler (ratio)c_i3_ratio carrier to 3rd order intermod ratio in

dB at DUT output planec_i5_ratio carrier to 5th order intermod ratio in

dB at DUT output planec_i7_ratio carrier to 7th order intermod ratio in

dB at DUT output plane

i_in_stop stop input current in mA for mode 1with current control

i_limit[ ] current limit in mA for each powersupply

imeas[ ] measured current in mA for eachpower supply

imeter[ ] instrument_type structure for eachcurrent meter

ireq[ ] requested current for each powersupply

mode integer specifying the bias mode0 = bias is disabled1 = specify V_out, I_out2 = specify V_out, V_in3 = specify V_out, I_in4 = specify V_out only(self bias on input)

ps[ ] instrument_type structure for eachpower supply

ps_channel[ ] channel to use for each power supplyr_series[ ] series resistance in ohms for each

power supplyread_delay-ms delay in mSec after setting biassequence[ ] position of each power supply in the

turn on/off sequenceset_delay_ms delay in mSec after setting biasv_in_limit input bias voltage limit in voltsv_in_start start input voltage in volts for mode 1

with voltage controlv_in_stop stop input voltage in volts for mode 1

with voltage controlvmeas[ ] measured voltage in volts for each

power supplyvmeter[ ] instrument_type structure for each

voltmetervreq[ ] requested voltage in volts for each

power supply

The structure user_setup_type contains the followingelements:

acp_adj_low ratio in dB of power in the loweradjacent channel to power in thedesired channel

acp_adj_up ratio in dB of power in the upperadjacent channel to power in thedesired channel

acp_alt_low ratio in dB of power in the loweralternate channel to power in thedesired channel

acp_alt_up ratio in dB of power in the upperalternate channel to power in thedesired channel

Page 172: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A3-4 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

c_raw1 uncorrected reading of the lowercarrier amplitude in dBm

c_raw2 uncorrected reading of the uppercarrier amplitude in dBm

c_lo lower carrier signal at DUT plane indBm

c_up upper carrier signal at DUT plane indBm

delta_gt_dut difference between gt_dut andgt_s_dut

demo_mode integer flag(0=NOT demo mode,1=demo mode)

dut_s spara_type structure of DUTdut_s_valid integer flag for existing DUT spara

0 = spara do not exist1 = spara exist

duty_cycle duty cycle in %eff_pwr_added power added efficiency in percent at

DUT planefreq Frequency in GHzgamma_s complex source reflection coefficient

looking into RF sourcegp_dut power gain at DUT plane (ratio)gpib_board instrument_type structure for the GPIB

boardgt_dut transducer gain at DUT plane (ratio)gt_s_dut transducer gain at DUT plane

calculated from s-parameters (ratio)i3 3rd order intermod power in dBm at

DUT output planei5 5th order intermod power in dBm at

DUT output planei7 7th order intermod power in dBm at

DUT output planei3_lo lower 3rd order intermod power in

dBm at DUT planei3_raw1 uncorrected reading of the lower 3rd

order intermod amplitude in dBmi3_raw2 uncorrected reading of the upper 3rd

order intermod amplitude in dBmi3_up upper 3rd order intermod power in

dBm at DUT planei5_lo lower 5th order intermod power in

dBm at DUT planei5_raw1 uncorrected reading of the lower 5th

order intermod amplitude in dBmi5_raw2 uncorrected reading of the upper 5th

order intermod amplitude in dBmi5_up upper 5th order intermod power in

dBm at DUT planei7_lo lower 7th order intermod power in

dBm at DUT plane

i7_raw1 uncorrected reading of the lower 7thorder intermod amplitude in dBm

i7_raw2 uncorrected reading of the upper 7thorder intermod amplitude in dBm

i7_up upper 7th order intermod power indBm at DUT plane

imod_meas_method integer flag for intermod measurementmethod (0 = Peak Search, 1 = Zero Span)

ip3 3rd order intercept point in dBm atDUT output plane

ip5 5th order intercept point in dBm atDUT output plane

ip7 7th order intercept point in dBm atDUT output plane

meas_freq_ghz measured frequency in GHzmeas_mode integer flag showing measurement

type (equal to one of the constantsPOWER, IMOD, or ACP)

num_user number of user functionsp1 [ ] probe 1 positions of tuners during

measurementp2 [ ] probe 2 postions of tuners during

measurementpin_avail available input power at the input of

the source tuner in mWpin_avail_dut available input power in mW at

DUT planepin_deliv_dut delivered input power in mW at

DUT planepin_tol-db tolerance in dBm for setting pinpin_raw uncorrected reading from the input

power meter in mWpm_in instrument_type structure for

input power meterpm_out instrument_type structure for funda-

mental output power meterpm_out_2nd instrument_type structure for 2nd

harmonic output power meterpm_out_3rd instrument_type structure for 3rd

harmonic output power meterpm_refl instrument_type structure for reflect-

ion power meterpout_dut delivered output power in mW at

DUT planepout_raw uncorrected reading from the output

power meter in mWpout_req_db requested pout in dBmpout_tol_db tolerance in dBm for setting poutpower_mode power_mode structure. Each element

of this structure with a value greaterthan zero is selected for measurement.

p_prog_db programmed power for the RF sourcein dBm

Page 173: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A3-5

p_prog2_db programmed power for the second RFsource in dBm

prefl_raw uncorrected reading from the reflect-ion power meter in mW

prf_khz pulse repetition rate in KHzps_out [ ] pm_type structure of output power

sensor efficiency, loss and complexload reflection coefficient

refl_coef_dut voltage reflection coefficient ratio atDUT plane (ratio)

refl_db_dut return loss at DUT plane (dB)source instrument_type structure for

RF sourcesource2 instrument_type structure for

second RF sourcespa_avg_lower number of averages for intermod

measurementspa_avg_upper number of averages for carrier

measurementspa_ip3_db third order intercept point of the

spectrum analyzer in dBmspa_min_atten_db minimum allowable spectrum analy-

zer attenuation in dBspa_popt_db optimum power to spectrum analyzer

mixer in dBmspa_popt_mode integer flag for spectrum analyzer power

setting mode(0 = fixed,1 = auto, 2 = measured)

spa_res_bw_khz spectrum analyzer resolutionbandwidth in KHz

spa_res_bw_mode integer flag for resolution bandwidthmode(0 = fixed, 1 = auto)

spa_span_ratio tone span ratiospectrum_anal instrument_type structure for

spectrum analyzerspur_db worst case measured spurious signalspur_freq_ghz frequency for spur_dbsrc_modulation_type

string with information about modula-tion type

tone_spacing_mhz tone spacing in MHztrans_phase measured transmission phasetuner [ ] spara_type structure of tuners in

measurement positionuser [ ] array of instrument_type structures

for user defined instruments

user_name an array of strings containing the nameof each user parameter

user_units an array of strings containing theunits of each user parameter

The structure noise_power_type contains the followingelements:

cal_noise_load integer flag for noise receiver reflectioncoeff cal method0 = use noise data only1 = use 1-port s-parameters

enr ENR value of noise source in dBfreq Frequency in GHzgamma_cold noise source reflection coefficient,

cold stategamma_hot noise source reflection coefficient, hot

stategamma_ld measured noise receiver reflection

coefficientnumber number of measured source positions

0 = use noise data only1 = use 1-port s-parameters

pcold[ ] array of measured cold noise powervalues

phot[ ] array of measured hot noise powervalues

rf_atten noise figure meter RF attenuator settingfor measured data

selected[ ] array of flags to show whichmeasured points were used for thenoise parameter calculation

t_amb ambient temperature in Celciustuner1_s[ ] array of s-parameters of the source

tunertuner2_s s-parameters of the load tuner

The structure noise_para_type contains the followingelements:

dut_s s-parameters of the DUTfmin minimum noise figure (linear ratio)freq frequency in GHzgam1 receiver input reflection coefficient

(cal data only)gopt optimum source reflection coefficient

for fminimeas[ ] measured current in mA for each

power supplyp0 receiver gain (linear ratio, cal data

only)raw_data noise_power_type structure containing

noise raw data

Page 174: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A3-6 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

rn normalized noise resistancesolved integer flag indicating noise parameter

solution founduser[ ] array of user-defined parametersvmeas[ ] measured voltage in Volts for each

power supplyThe structure noise_cal_type contains the followingelements:

cal_tuner tuner used for cal(0 = source, 1 = load)

max_atten index to the maximum calibrated noisefigure meter RF attenuation

min_atten index to the minimum calibrated noisefigure meter RF attenuation

npara[ ] array of noise_para_type structureswith noise parameters for eachcalibrated RF attenuator setting

The structure user_noise_setup_type contains thefollowing elements:

averaging number of noise figure meter averagesbias bias_type structure with bias datacheck_osc integer flag for checking oscillations

(0=don’t check, 1=check bias foroscillation)

control_string string with information from setupmenu

demo_mode integer flag in demo mode setting(0=NOT demo mode,1=demo mode)

freq Frequency in GHzfreq_if IF Frequency in MHzgpib-board instrument_type structure for the GPIB

boardi_atten index to the actual noise figure meter

RF attenuationlo_on_mainbus integer flag for local oscillator ( 0=local

oscillator is on the private GPIB of thenoise figure meter,1=local oscillatoris on the main GPIB)

lo_power local oscillator power in dBmmax_atten index to the maximum valid noise

figure meter RF attenuationmin_atten index to the minimum valid noise

figure meter RF attenuationncal_para noise_cal_type structure with cal datanf_calc_method single noise figure calculation method

integer flag(0=y-factor, 1=hot only, 2=cold only)

nfm instrument_type structure for the noisefigure meter

noise_mode structure indicating which parametersare measured

noise_ts instrument_type structure for the noisetest set

npara noise_para_type structure with noiseparameter data

nparam_math_optionmath algorithm integer flag(0=math1, 1=math2, 2=cold only)

num_user number of user functionsoscillation integer flag showing if oscillation was

found (0=no oscillation, 1=oscillationfound)

osc_tol_i_in I_in tolerance to indicate oscillationosc_tol_i_out I_out tolerance to indicate oscillationosc_tol_v_in V_in tolerance to indicate oscillationosc_tol_v_out V_out tolerance to indicate oscillationsideband sideband type integer flag

(0=DSB, 1=LSB, 2=USB, 3=DIRECT,4=AUTO)

source_lo instrument_type structure for thelocal oscillator

t_amb ambient temperature in Celsiususer[ ] array of instrument_type structures

for user defined instrumentsuser_name array of user funtion namesuser_units array of user function units

A3.4 Driver Development Process

The general process of driver developmentis as follows:

a. Select an existing driver module whichis the most similar to the driver to bewritten. Copy this module to a newname prior to any editing.

b. Edit the new copy of the driver moduleto put in the proper commands andcodes for the new instrument.

c. Compile and link the new driver to createthe .EXE file. This may be done in theMicrosoft Developer Studio, or by usinga batch file from the DOS commandline.

The Developer Studio is generallysuggested since it also provides fordebugging, if necessary. See Section

Page 175: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A3-7

A3.5, for deta i l s on se t t ing up aDeveloper Studio project.

To compile and link from the DOScommand line, use the following syntax:

drvw newfile ...main

where "newfile" is the name of the new.c driver file, and "...main" is the name ofthe main module for the driver categorylisted in Table A3-1.

d. Run the new .EXE file by itself with nocommand line arguments. Use the testmenu to test the operation of each of therequired functions.

e. Run the SNPW program. In the <Setup><Instruments> Menu, enter the newdriver path and file name and otherinformation. Then run the measurementand do a complete test with the newdriver.

A3.5 Procedure to Create a Developer StudioProject to Work on a Driver

This procedure will set up a project inMicrosoft’s Developer Studio that can beused and re-used to work on dr iverdevelopment. The Developer Studio comesas part of the Microsoft Visual C++ package.

1. Start the Microsoft Developer Studio

2. Create a new project by clicking menuitem <File> <New...>. When the dialogcomes up, select the project tab and dothe following:

a. Click on the button to the right of thelocation edit box, and browse for the“Drivers” directory of the ATSsoftware.

b. Click on the Project name edit box,and type in a project name. A genericname such as DrvTest is suggested,since you may want to use this projectfor a variety of drivers in the future.

c. Finally, double click on “Win32Application”. This will open the newproject in the Developer Studio.

3. Add the National Instruments objectfile and the common controls library tothe project by clicking menu item<Project> <Settings...>. When the dialogcomes up, select the Link tab and do thefollowing:

a. Click on the left side of the Object/Library Modules edit box to put thecursor there.

b. Use the left arrow key to make surethat the cursor is all the way to theleft.

c. Type in “..\gpib-32.obj comctl32.lib”,followed by a space to separate it fromthe next library file.

d. If you want to, you may also changethe name of the output .EXE file inthis dialog.

e. click “OK” to close the Settingsdialog.

4. Make a copy of an existing driver of thesame type to use as a starting template,if this is going to be a new driver.

a. Click the menu item <File> <Open...>,and browse up one directory level tothe drivers directory. Select and openthe file that you intend to copy. Thiswill bring that file into the Studiowindow.

b. Click the menu item <File> <SaveAs...>,and browse to the drivers directory.Enter a new filename. It is recom-mended that you start the name withthe same first few letters of otherdrivers in that category, to make iteasier to browse for later. Be sure toinclude the .c extension in the name.

5. Add the source files to the project byclicking menu item <Project> <Add ToProject> <Files. . .>. When the f i le

Page 176: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A3-8 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

browser comes up, click the “Up onelevel” button to get back to the driversdirectory. Then select the files that youneed for the drivers. This will include:

a. The driver file that you want to workon. If it is a new driver, this shouldbe the copy of an existing driver thatyou will use as a template.

b. The .c and .rc files associated withthe “main” module of this driver type.For example, if you are working on asource driver, this will be “ “Srcmain.c”,and “Srcmain.rc”. Don’t worry about theremaining files, as the Developer Studiowill add these automatically.

6. You are now ready to go. To compile, Clickmenu item <Build> <Rebuild All>. Forsubsequent builds, just click on the build toolbutton. You can also edit, debug, or just runthe driver from this environment.

7. Copy the completed .EXE file to the driversdirectory. When you finish editing andcompiling, the executable file will benamed DrvTest.exe unless you renamedit in step 4. It will be in the subdirectorydrivers\DrvTest\debug. Rename it, andmove it up to the drivers subdirectory foruse.

8. To use this project to work on a differentdriver in the future, just delete the currentfiles, and then add the files that you want towork on.

A3.6 Updating Custom Drivers to Work withNew Software Versions

Existing drivers must usually be re-compiled withthe new copy of drv.h when a new softwareversion is installed. Normally, this is all that isrequired, unless the driver is to be updated to takeadvantage of some new capability. The simplestway to do the re-compiling is to maintain a batchfile similar to drvw.bat, but with one line forevery custom driver in use. Then, after installingthe new SNPW version, the batch file can beexecuted one time, and everything is done.

The reason for re-compiling is that new softwarereleases always have new features and capabilityadded, and this usually means that the datastructures have expanded to include new items.

If the drivers were compiled with the old datastructures, then the memory locations of somevariables within a data structure will be offsetfrom what the main SNPW program expects. It istherefore absolutely necessary for the drivers touse the same data structures as the main program.

A3.7 Converting Drivers from Version 2.20to Version 3.30In version 3.30, some major changes were madein some driver categories that will requiremodification of existing custom drivers. Themodifications are as follows:

1. There is now only one main bias driver(bias.c), that will call all the specified powersupply, voltmeter and current meter drivers.The individual drivers are in DLL format, andcan be compiled with the batch filedrvDLL.bat.

This allows any combination of biasinstruments to be used without re-writingany drivers. It is strongly recommended thatcustom bias drivers be converted to the newformat of individual bias instrument DLLdrivers.

Although not recommended, prior bias driverscan still be used, but need modification tocompile because of several varibles that havebeen changed to array structures.

2. User functions that use bias variables mayneed modification to compile, because ofseveral variables that have been changed toarray structures. Index constants to get datafor various power supplies are: BIAS_OUT,BIAS_IN, BIAS_AUX1, BIAS_AUX2,BIAS_AUX3, and BIAS_AUX4.

3. User functions that make use of harmonictuner s-parameters may need modifi-cation to compile because of a new data

Page 177: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A3-9

definition. The s-parameters of all tuners,embedded with all applicable s-para-meter blocks, are now contained in onearray. Index constants to get tuners-parameters are: SRC_TNR, SRC_2ND_TNR,SRC_3RD_TNR, LOAD_TNR, LD_2ND_TNR,LD_3RD_TNR.

4. Power meter drivers have a new functionadded, init_pmeter( ). This was added tosupport some of the new power metersthat can be setup for different bandwidthsor operating modes, although it will donothing in most power meters drivers.The easiest way to add the function is tocopy the function from a driver such aspm437.c where the funct ion doesnothing except return(0).

Page 178: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page
Page 179: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A4-1

Theory of Load and Source Pull Measurement

Load pull consists of varying or “pulling” the loadimpedance seen by a Device Under Test (DUT)while measuring the performance of the DUT.Source pull is the same as load pull, except that thesource impedance is changed instead of the loadimpedance.

Load and source pull is used to measure a DUT inactual operating conditions. This method isimportant for large-signal, nonlinear devices wherethe operating point may change with power level ortuning. Load or source pull is not usually neededfor linear devices, where performance with anyload can be predicted from small signal s-parameters.

Calibrating to measure output power and gainconsists of measuring the available input power atthe power source reference plane and the couplingvalue of the directional couplers. An input powercoupler is calibrated by measuring the offset fromthe available input power at the Power CalibrationPlane. Output couplers, connecting either aspectrum analyzer or ACP analyzer, are calibratedby measuring the offset from the measured outputpower at the power sensor plane. A reflectioncoupler is calibrated by measuring the reflection atmultiple reflection phase values, relative to thePower Calibration Plane. This minimizes directivityerrors, although good coupler directivity is stillimportant for the best accuracy.

Once the available input power and coupling areknown, the output power, transducer gain, andpower gain can al l be measured wi th anycombination of source or load impedance. Outputpower is the power delivered to the load. Transducergain is the ratio of delivered output power toavailable input power. Power gain is the ratio ofdelivered output power to delivered input power.

The objective of the measurement is to get thepower and gain values at the DUT reference planes.Although the tuners are very low loss, bias tees andother components may need to be deembedded, sothe loss must be considered. To get the output

power at the DUT reference plane, the dissipativeloss of the load tuner is added to the raw measuredoutput power. To get the available input power atthe DUT reference plane, the dissipative loss of thesource tuner is subtracted from the calibratedavailable input power. To get the delivered inputpower at the DUT input reference plane, thereflected power at the source is subtracted from thecalibrated available power at the source. Thedissipative loss of the source tuner is then subtractedfrom the result to shift from the source powerreference plane to the DUT input reference plane.

☞ NOTE: Power gain errors are likely if thereare large mismatches at the DUT input.Here, the measured delivered power is asmall difference between two large num-bers. Errors from noise, drift, finite couplerdirectivity, vary wildly. If the apparent re-flected power is greater than the calibratedavailable power, delivered power cannot becalculated at all.

The major errors in power gain are avoided by usingthe source tuner to match the DUT input, if the DUTdoes not oscillate. Therefore, if power gain is to bemeasured, be sure to do a source pull after the loadpull, and then look at power gain.

If a DUT begins to oscillate, power gain becomesalmost meaningless. Also, an oscillating DUT maygenerate some power in the reverse direction causingthe apparent reflected power to be greater than thecalibrated input power, even when the DUT input ismatched. This is indicated by asterisks in the deliveredpower or power gain columns of the printouts.

In the full load pull measurement, the source tuner isset to a fixed position, and power and gain are measuredat a variety of randomly located load impedancepoints. After all of the data are taken, the reflectionplane is divided into a rectangular grid, and the apparentpower at each grid point is calculated. This is done byinterpolating on a surface determined by thesurrounding points; the closest points are weightedmost. Higher resolution comes from using finer gridspacing, and accuracy depends upon the spread andresolution of the points in the area.

Appendix 4

Page 180: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A4-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

The advantage of the random contouring method isthat no knowledge of what contours are desired isrequired before the measurement. This providesmuch more flexibility than an approach requiringcontours to be searched, for example, and allowsthe tuners to be pre-characterized for best accuracy.Extrapolation outside the measured points is notreliable, so it is important to surround the area ofinterest on the reflection plane.

The contouring method makes no assumption aboutlinearity or other behavior of the DUT. Contours ofnonlinear DUTs are usually not circular, and maytake unexpected shapes, especially when the DUTcomes close to oscillation. Contour plotting oftentells more about a device than any other method.Source pull contours are measured and calculatedin the same way as the load pull contours aremeasured and calculated. The only difference isthat the load tuner is set to a fixed position, and thesource tuner is the one that is varied.

Page 181: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A5-1

Theory of Noise Measurement

Noise, a natural phenomenon, affects most microwaveand RF systems. It masks the desired signal, so it isimportant to minimize its effects. Although there areseveral types of noise, thermal noise greatly affects linearmicrowave and RF systems, so it is the focus of thissoftware.

Noise figure, a measure of the noise generated by a 2-portdevice, is easily determined. Commercial noise figuremeters have been developed to measure this, but they arelimited because they only measure SIMPLE NOISEFIGURE. That is the noise figure of a device terminatedwith a particular value of source impedance. The problemis that the noise figure usually varies as the sourcereflection varies.

To minimize the effects of device noise figure then, therelationship between noise figure and source impedance(or source reflection coefficient) must be known. Thenoise figure depends on the COMPLETE NOISEPARAMETERS as shown in Equation A5-1 below:

4 Rn |Γs – Γopt|2

F = Fmin + Zo |1+Γopt|

2(1–|Γs|2)

where

F = Noise figure (linear ratio)

Fmin = Minimum noise figure (linear ratio)

Γopt = Optimum complex reflection coefficient

Rn = Noise resistance

Γ s = Complex source reflection coefficient

The purpose of this software is to find the complete set ofnoise parameters consisting of Fmin, Γopt and Rn. Since Γoptis complex, this makes a total of four scalar parameters.

Appendix 5

Γopt is the source reflection coefficient which correspondsto Fmin. Rn is a scale factor which shows how fast F changeswith Γ s. (The software actually displays rn, which is Rn

normalized to 50 ohms.)

To find Fmin, Γopt and Rn the simple noise figure must bemeasured at a variety of source impedances using theATS. In principle, since four scalar variables are to befound, only four measurements are required. In practice,however, it is much more effective to measure morepoints, and use a least means square’s mathematicaltechnique to extract the parameters from over determineddata.

Noise characterization also requires the parameters ofthe Device Under Test (DUT) to be separated from theparameters of the measuring system to which the DUT isconnected. To do this, the system must be calibrated tolearn the system parameters. The noise contribution ofthe system (often called the second stage since it followsthe DUT) will vary with its source impedance accordingto equation A5-1.

Therefore, the complete noise and gain parameters of thesystem must be known to determine the system noisecontribution when a particular DUT is connected.

After the system is calibrated, noise characterization of aDUT can be done. This consists of measuring the totalnoise figure, Ftotal, with several different source impedances.The noise figure of the DUT for each position, Fdut, is thengiven from the Friis cascade equation as shown in equationA5-2 below. Gdut is the available gain of the DUT asresolved from the DUT S-parameters and the sourcereflection coefficient.

Fsys – 1Fdut = Ftotal –

Gdut

A5-1:

A5-2:

Page 182: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A5-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

A practical consideration shown by Equation A5-2 is thatif Fsys is high and Gdut is low, then Fdut will be a smalldifference between large numbers. This would make itvery sensitive to errors. Therefore, if DUTs with low noisefigure values are to be measured, it is important to keepFsys as low as practical. That is why a load tuner isimportant when the DUT has a high output reflectioncoefficient. The effect of losses in the tuners, bias tees,and the fixture is eliminated in this software. The lossesare resistive in nature, so they add noise proportional tothe ambient temperature in kelvins (absolute temperaturescale). During the setup, the ambient temperature isentered in degrees Celsius and is later read by theprogram during a calibration, conversion to kelvins isautomatic.

Another practical consideration is that the reflectioncoefficient of the noise source usually changes whenswitched between the hot and cold states. This softwaretakes this rigorously into account by using the noisepower function given in Equation A5-3. The noise powerequations allow the source impedance to be independentfor each power measurement, and therefore eliminatethis traditional source of error.

P = kB{[tns + t0(F1-1)]Gal + t0(F2-1)}Gt2

where

P = The total measured noise power.

k = Boltzmann’s constant.

B = The system bandwidth.

to = 290 kelvins.

tns = Temperature of the noise source in kelvins.

F1 = The DUT noise figure (function of sourceimpedance).

F2 = The system noise figure (a function of theDUT output impedance).

Ga1 = The DUTs available gain (a function ofsource impedance).

Gt2 = System transducer gain (function of DUToutput impedance).

A5-3:

Page 183: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A6-1

Theory of Intermodulation DistortionMeasurements

A6.1 Introduction

Intermodulation distortion occurs when the non-linearity of a device or system with multiple inputfrequencies causes undesired outputs at otherfrequencies. In a communications system, thismeans that signals in one channel can causeinterference with adjacent channels. As thespectrum becomes busier and the channelsbecome more tightly spaced, minimizingintermodulation distortion becomes moreimportant.

A6.2 Two-Tone Intermodulation Testing

A convenient way to measure intermodulationdistortion is to combine two equal power signalswith a set frequency spacing at the input of thedevice under test. The output spectrum will looklike Figure A6-1. The two largest signals are theamplified carrier signals, and the smaller signals,moving away from the carriers in both directions,are the 3rd order, 5th order, and 7th orderintermodulation products respectively. Thefrequency spacing between all of the signals isequal.

The ten measurement parameters of interest hereare as follows:

Appendix 6

Carrier (C): This is the power of the carriersignal in dBm units. It is similar to the Poutparameter, except that C is measured witha spectrum analyzer, and Pout is measuredwith the power meter with only one RFinput signal.

3rd Order Intermodulation Product (I3):This is the power of the spurious 3rd orderintermodulation signal in dBm units,measured with the spectrum analyzer.

Carrier to 3rd Order Intermodulation Ratio(C/I3): This is the ratio of the carrier powerto the spurious 3rd order intermodulationpower in dB.

Third Order Intercept Point (IP3): This is afigure of merit in dBm for the device andnormally varies with tuning.

5th Order Intermodulation Product (I5):This is the power of the spurious 5th orderintermodulation signal in dBm units,measured with the spectrum analyzer.

Carrier to 5th Order Intermodulation Ratio(C/I5): This is the ratio of the carrier powerto the spurious 5th order intermodulationpower in dB.

5th Order Intercept Point (IP5): This is afigure of merit in dBm for the device andnormally varies with tuning.

Figure A6-1. Output Spectrum of Two-Tone Intermod Test

Page 184: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MAURY MICROWAVE

A6-2 Operating Manual June 2002

MT993-2 Rev L

7th Order Intermodulation Product (I7): This isthe power of the spurious 7th order intermodsignal in dBm units, measured with the spectrumanalyzer.

Carrier to 7th Order Intermod Ratio (C/I7): This isthe ratio of the carrier power to the spurious 7thorder intermod power in dB.

7th Order Intercept Point (IP7): This is a figure ofmerit in dBm for the device and normally varieswith tuning.

A6.3 Third Order Intercept Point

The non-linear transfer function of a device orsystem can be expressed as a series expansion:

f(x) = a0 + a1(x) + a2(x)2 + a3(x)3 + a4(x)4 + ...

The intermod signals shown in Figure A6-1 comefrom the third order term in the series expansion,hence the name third order intermod product.Because of the third order, it will increase withinput power much faster than the carrier asshown in Figure A6-2. In dBm units, which is alogarithmic function, the intermod signal willincrease with power three times as fast as thecarrier signal.

The measurement of the third order interceptpoint is illustrated in Figure A6-2. If the linearportion of the C v. Pin and the I v. Pin curves areextrapolated out, the interception point is calledthe third order intercept point (IP3). In Figure A6-2, this is the intersection of the dotted lines. Thistheoretical point is never reached in practice,because both curves will saturate beforereaching it. However, IP3 is often used as a meritfunction for the device.

If the 3:1 theoretical slope difference is assumed,then the IP3 can be calculated from only onepower level. If a power sweep is done, IP3calculated this way will be constant in the linearregion if the 3:1 slope assumption was correct. Asthe carrier and intermod signals saturate, the IP3value will usually drop off, indicating an invalidmeasurement. At the lower power levels, IP3 willstart to change as the spectrum analyzer noisefloor is reached, also indicating an invalidmeasurement. The correct measurement istherefore in the power range where IP3 staysconstant.

☞ NOTE: Theoretically, IP3 is not a function ofpower level. However, the dynamic range islimited by the spectrum analyzer noise floor onthe low end, and DUT saturation or spectrumanalyzer intermodulation on the high end. Look-ing at IP3 as a function of power provides a goodway of checking the valid measurement range.

Figure A6-2. Measurement of Third Order Intercept Point

Page 185: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A6-3

A6.4 5th and 7th Order Intercept Points

The 5th and 7th order intercept points (IP5 andIP7) are determined in a manner to IP3. The maindifference is that the 5th order intermodincreases with input power five times as fast asthe carrier (in dBm units). The 7th order intermodincreases with input power seven times a fast asthe carrier (in dBm units).

Page 186: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page

MT993-2 Rev LMAURY MICROWAVE

June 2002 Operating Manual A7-1

Appendix 7

Extension File Description

.ACL Adjacent channel power calibration file

.CFG System configuration file

.CTL Automatic sequence control file

.DC DC I-V measurement data file

.ICL Intermodulation Distortion calibration file

.LP Load Pull data file

.LP2 2nd Harmonic Load Pull data file

.LP3 3rd Harmonic Load Pull data file

.NCL Noise calibration file

.NS Noise source definition file

.PCL Power calibration file

.PM Power Meter sensor definition file

.TUN Automatic Tuner characterization file

.S1P 1-port S-Parameter data file

.S2P 2-port S-Parameter data file

.S2B Swept bias noise data file

.SF Swept frequency noise data file

.SNP Default system files

.SP Source Pull data file

.SP2 2nd Harmonic Source Pull data file

.SP3 3rd Harmonic Source Pull data file

.SWP Swept power measurement data file

.SPL Sweep Plan data file

.TP Sweep Plan setup file

.XLS Spread sheet file with contour data

SNP Standard Files

Page 187: MT993-2 Rev L - Department of Electronicsweb.doe.carleton.ca/~nagui/labequip/loadpull/papers/loadpull/MT993... · MT993-2 ii Contents MAURY MICROWAVE June 2002 Section Title Page